Skip to main content

Full text of "Rifle and infantry tactics"

See other formats


I 


d 


COL.  GEORGE  WASHINGTON  FLOWERS 
MEMORIAL  COLLECTION 


DUKE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
DURHAM.  N.  C. 


PRESENTED  BY 

W.  W.  FLOWERS 


THE  ONLY  COPY-RIGHT  EDITION. 


RIFLE 


INFANTRY  TACTICS, 


REVISED  AND  IMPROVED 


COL.  W.  J.  HARDEE,  C.  S.  ARMY 


SECOND   EDITION. 


Vol.  II. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


M0BI1>E: 
S.  H.  GOETZEL  &  CO. 


FIRST   YEAR    OF  THE   CONFEUi  RACY. 


Y.ntcfrA,  according  to  Act  of  Congrees,  in  the  year  1861,  by 
S.  H.  GOETZEL  &  CO. 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Alabama,  for  the 
Confederate  States  of  America. 


77S92 


RIFLE    AND    INFANTRY    TACTICS. 


TITLE     FOURTH. 


"    SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION. 

Formation  of  the  Battalion. 

1.  Every  colonel  will  labor  to  habituate  his  bat- 
talion to  form  line  of  battle,  by  night  as  well  as  by 
day,  with  the  greatest  possible  promptitude. 

2.  The  color-company  will  generally  be  de.signated 
as  the  directing  company.  That,  as  soon  as  formed, 
will  be  placed  on  the  direction  the  colonel  may  have 
determined  for  the  line  of  battle.  The  otlier  compa- 
nies will  form  on  it,  to  the  right  and  left,  on  the  prin- 
ciples of  successive  formations  which  will  be  herein 
prescribed. 

3.  The  color-bearer  may  have  received  the  color 
from  the  hands  of  the  colonel ;  but  if  there  be  day- 
light, and  time,  the  color  will  be  produced  with  due 
solemnity. 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color  escort. 

4.  When  the  battalion  turns  out  under  arms  and 
the  color  is  wanted,  a  company  other  than  that  of 


277392 


6  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PAPtT  L 

the  color,  will  be  ])ut  in  march  to  receive  and  es- 
cort it. 

5.  The  march  will  be  in  the  following  order,  in 
quick  time,  and  without  music ;  the  field  music,  fol- 
lowed by  the  band;  the  escort  in  column  by  platoon, 
right  in  front,  with  arms  on  the  right  shoulder,  and 
the  color-bearer  between  the  platoons. 

6.  Arrived  in  front  of  the  tent  or  quarters  of  the 
colonel,  the  escort  will  form  line,  the  field  music  and 
band  on  the  right,  and  arms  will  be  brought  to  a 
shoulder. 

7.  The  moment  the  escort  is  in  line,  the  color-bear- 
er, preceded  by  the  first  lieutenant,  and  followed  by 
a  sergeant  of  the  escort,  will  go  to  receive  the  color. 

8.  When  the  color-bearer  shall  come  out,  followed 
by  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant,  he  will  halt  before  the 
entrance  ;  the  escort  will  present  arn»s,  and  the  field 
nmsic  will  sound  to  the  color. 

9.  After  some  twenty  seconds,  the  captain  will 
cause  the  sound  to  cease,  arms  to  be  shouldered,  and 
then  break  by  platoon  into  column;  the  color-bearer 
will  place  himself  betw-een  the  platoons,  and  the  lieu- 
tenant and  sergeant  will  resume  their  posts. 

10.  The  escort  will  march  back  to  the  battalion  to 
the  sound  of  music  in  quick  time,  and  in  the  same 
order  as  above,  the  guide  on  the  right.  The  march 
will  be  so  conducted  that  when  the  escort  arrives  at 
one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front  of  the  right  of 
the  battalion,  the  direction  of  the  march  \\\\\  be  par- 
allel to  its  front,  and  when  the  color  arrives  nearly 
opposite  its  place  in  line,  the  column  will  change  di- 


SCHOOL  OF  TFIE  BATTALION— PART  I.  7 

rection  to  the  left,  and  the  riglit  guide  will   direct 
himself  on  the  centre  of  the  battalion. 


Honors  paid  to  the  color. 


11.  Arrived  at  the  distance  of  twenty  paces  from 
the  battalion,  the  escort  will  halt,  and  the  music 
cease;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  six  paces  before 
the  centre  of  the  battalion,  the  color-hearer  will  ap- 
proach the  colonel,  by  the  front,  in  quick  time;  when 
at  thf  distance  often  paces,  he  will  halt:  the  colonel 
will  cause  arms  to  be  presented,  and  to  the  color  to  be 
sounded,  which  being  executed,  the  color-bearer  will 
take  his  place  in  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard, 
and  the  battalion,  by  command,  shoulder  arms. 

12.  The  escort,  field  music,  and  band,  will  return 
in  quick  time  to  their  several  places  in  line  of  battle, 
marching  by  the  rear  of  the  batt.ilion. 

13.  The  color  will  be  escorted  back  to  the  colonel's 
tent  or  quarters  in  the  above  order. 


General  Rules  and  Division  of  the  School  of  the 
Battalion. 


14.  This  school  has  for  its  object  the  instruction 
of  batt.ili<Mis  singly,  and  thus  to  prepare  them  for 
manoeuvres  in  line.  The  harmony  so  indispensable  in 
the  movements  of  many  battalions,  can  only  be  at- 
tained by  the  use  of  the  same  commands,  the  same 
principles,  and  the  same  means  of  execution.  Hence, 
all  colonel's  and  actual  commanders  of  battalions  will 


8  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  L 

conform  themselves,  without  addition  or  curtailment, 
to  what  will  herein  be  prescribed. 

15.  When  a  battalion  instructed  in  this  drill  shall 
manoeuvre  in  line,  the  c<ilonel  will  regulate  its  move- 
ments, as  prescribed  in  the  third  volume  of  the  Tac- 
tics for  heavy  infantry. 

16.  The  school  of  the  battalion  will  be  divided  into 
five  parts. 

17.  The  first  will  comprehend  opening  and  closing 
ranks,  and  the  execution  of  the  ditlerent  fires. 

18.  The  second,  the  different  modes  of  passing  from 
the  order  in  battle,  to  the  order  in  column. 

19.  The  third,  the  march  in  coliunn,  and  the  other 
movements  incident  thereto. 

20.  The  fourth,  the  difterent  modes  of  passing  from 
the  order  in  column  to  the  order  in  battle. 

21.  The  fifth  will  comprehend  the  march  in  line  of 
battle,  in  advance  and  in  retreat;  the  passage  of  de- 
files in  retreat;  the  march  by  the  flank;  the  forma- 
tion by  file  into  line  of  battle;  the  change  of  fnmt; 
the  column  d(tubled  on  the  centre;  dispositions 
against  cavalry;  the  rally,  and  rules  for  mananivring 
bv  the  rear  rank. 


SCHOOT.  OF  TIIK  BATTALION— PART  I. 


PART     FIRST. 

Opening  and  closing  ranhs,  and  the  execution  of  the 
different  fires. 

Articlk  First. 

To  open  and  to  close  ranks. 

22.  Tlio  colonel,  wishing  the  ranks  to  be  opened, 
will  command  : 

1.  Prepare  to  open  ranhs. 

23.  At  this  command,  the.  lientenant  colonel  and 
major  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  bat- 
talion, the  tirst  on  the  tlaiik  of  the  file  closers,  and 
the  second  four  paces  from  the  front  rank  of  the  bat- 
talion. 

2.4.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

2.    To  the  rear,  open  order.     3.  MARCH. 

25.  At  the  second  command,  the  C(»vering  ser- 
geants, and  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion, 
will  place  themselves  foJir  paces  in  rear  of  the  front 
rank,  and  oj)posite  their  ])laces  in  line  of  battle,  in 
order  to  mark  the  new  alignment  of  the  rear  rank; 
the)'  will  b''  aligned  b.v  the  major  on  the  left  sergeant 
of  the  battalion,  who  will  be  careful  to  place  himself 


10  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  L 

exactly  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  and  to 
hold  his  piece  between  the  eyes,  erect  and  inverted, 
the  better  to  indicate  to  the  major  the  direction  to  be 
given  to  the  covering  sergeants. 

26.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  and  the 
file  closers  will  step  to  the  rear  withont  counting 
steps;  the  men  will  pass  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line 
traced  for  this  rank,  halt,  and  dress  forward  on  the 
covering  sergeants,  who  will  align  correctly  the  men 
of  their  respective  companies. 

27.  The  file  closers  will  fall  back  and  preserve  the 
distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  glancing 
eyes  to  the  right;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will,  from 
the  right,  align  them  on  the  file  closer  of  the  left, 
W'ho,  having  placed  himself  accurately  two  paces  from 
the  rear  rank,  will  invert  his  piece,  and  hold  it  up 
erect  between  his  eyes,  the  better  to  be  seen  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel. 


28.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  com- 
mand : 

4.  Front. 


At  this  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel,  major, 
and  the  left  sergeant,  will  retake  their  places  in  line 
of  battle. 

20.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  ranks  to  be  closed 
by  the  commands  prescribed  for  the  instructor  in  the 
school  of  the  comjjany,  No.  28. 


scfiool  of  the  battalion— part  i.         11 

Article  Second. 

Manual  of  Arms. 

30.  The  ranks  ho'iufr  closod,  the  colonel  will  cause 
the  following  times  and  pauses  to  be  executed  : 

Present  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Order  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

VnJxT  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Article  Third. 

Loading  at  tcill,  and  the  Firings. 

31.  The  colonel  will  next  cause  to  be  executed 
loading  at  will,  by  the  commands  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company  No,  45;  the  officers  and  ser- 
geants in  the  ranks  will  half  face  to  the  right  with 
the  men  at  the  eighth  time  of  loading,  and  will  face 
to  the  fr(»nt  when  the  men  next  to  them  come  to  a 
shoulder. 

32.  The  colonel  will  cause  to  be  executed  the  fire  by 
company,  the  fire  by  wing,  the  fire  by  battalion,  the 
fire  by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands  to 
be  herein  indicated. 

33.  The  fire  by  company  and  the  fire  by  file  will 


12  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  L 

always  be  direct;  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by 
\vin<j,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  may  be  either  direct  or 
oblique. 

'M.  When  the  fire  ought  to  be  oblicjue,  the  colonel 
will  give,  at  every  round,  the  caution  right  for  left) 
oblique,  between  the  connnands  ready  and  aim. 

35.  The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed  alter- 
nately by  the  right  and  left  companies  ot"  each  divi- 
sion, as  if  the  division  were  alone.  The  right  com- 
pany will  fire  first;  the  captain  of  the  left  will  not  give 
his  first  command  till  he  shall  see  one  or  two  pieces 
at  a  ready  in  the  right  comi)any  ;  the  captain  of  the 
latter,  after  the  first  discharge,  will  observe  the  same 
rule  in  respect  to  the  left  company;  and  the  fire  will 
thus  be  continued  alternately. 

3G.  The  colonel  will  observe  the  same  rule  in  the 
firing  by  wing. 

37.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  in  all  the  com- 
panies at  one,  and  will  be  executed  as  has  been  i)re- 
scribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  55  and  fol- 
lowing. The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each 
rank  alternately,  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company  No.  58  and  following. 

38.  The  color-guard  will  not  fire,  but  reserve  itself 
for  the  defence  of  the  color. 


The  fire  hj  company. 


39.  The  cohmel,  wishing  the  fire  by  comi)any  to  be 
executed,  will  command : 


1.  Fire  by  company.     2.  Commence  firing. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  L  13 

40.  At  the  first  conimaiul,  the  captains  and  cover- 
ing sergeants  will  take  the  positions  indicated  in  the 
school  of  the  company  No.  49. 

41.  The  color  and  its  gnard  will  step  back  at  the 
same  time,  so  as  to  bring  Ui<*  front  rank  (»f  the  gnard 
in  a  line  with  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion.  This 
rule  is  general  for  all  the  different  firings. 

42.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbered 
companies  will  C(»mmence  to  fire  ;  their  captains  will 
each  give  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  company  No.  50,  observing  to  precede  the  com- 
mand company  by  that  of  first,  third,  fifth,  or  seventh, 
according  to  the  nmuber  of  each. 

43.  The  captains  of  the  even  numbered  com- 
panies will  give,  in  their  turn,  the  same  commands, 
observing  to  precede  them  by  the  number  of  their 
respective  companies. 

44.  In  order  that  the  odd  numbered  companies  may 
not  all  fire  at  once,  their  captains  will  observe,  but 
only  for  the  first  discharge,  to  give  the  command  fire 
one  after  another ;  thus,  the  captain  of  the  third 
company  will  not  give  the  command  ^rc  until  he  has 
heard  the  fire  of  the  first  company ;  the  captain  of 
the  fifth  will  observe  the  same  rule  with  respect  to 
the  third,  and  the  captain  of  the  seventh  the  same 
rule  with  respect  to  the  fifth. 

45.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  fire  to  cease  by  the 
sound  to  cease  firing;  at  this  sound,  the  men  will 
execute  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany No.  63;  at  the  sound,  for  officers  to  take  their 
places  aft^er  firing,  the  captains,  covering  sergeants > 


14  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  I. 

and  color-guard,  will  promptly  resume  their  places  in 
line  of  battle:  this  rule  is  general  for  all  the  firings. 

The  fire  by  wing. 

46.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  this  fire  to  be 
executed,  he  will  command: 

1 .  lire  by  icing.     2.  Right  icing.      3.  Ready. 
4.  Alm.     5.  Fire.    6.  Load. 

47.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  wings  to  fire  alter- 
nately, and  he  will  recommence  the  fire  by  the  com- 
mands, 1.  Right  icing;  2.  AiM ;  3.  FiRE ;  4.  Load. 
1.  Left  icing ;  2.  AiM ;  3.  FiRE;  4.  Load;  in  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed  No.  35. 

The  fire  by  battalion. 

48.  The  colonel  will  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed 
by  the  commands  last  prescribed,  substituting  for 
the  first  two,  L  Fire  by  battalion;  2.  Battalion. 

The  fire  by  file. 

49.  To  cause  this  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Fire  by  file.    2.  Battalion.     3.  Ready. 
4.  Commence  firing. 

50.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  fire  will  commence 


SCHOOL  OF  TIIK  BATTALION— PART  L  15 

Oil  the  right  of  each  company,  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company  No.  57.  The  colonel  may,  if 
be  thinks  proper,  cause  the  fire  to  commence  on  the 
right  of  each  platoon. 

The  fire  by  rank. 

51.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  Fire  by  rank.     2.  Battalion.      3.  Ready.  4.  Rear 

rank.    5.  AiM.    6.  FiRE.    7.  Load. 

.52.  This  fire  will  be  executed  as  has  been  exo 
plained  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  59,  in  fol- 
lowing the  pnigression  prescribed  for  the  two  ranks 
which  should  fire  alternately. 

To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

53.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  battalion  to 
fire  to  the  rear,  he  will  command  : 

].  Face  by  the  rear  rank.     2.  Battalion. 

3.  About— Fac^. 

54.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains,  covering 
sergeants,  and  file  closers  will  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  No. 
69;  the  color-bearer  will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  and 
for  this  purpose,  the  corporal  of  his  file  will  step  be- 


16  tfCIlOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  I. 

fore  the  corpiinil  next  on  his  right  to  let  the  color- 
bearer  pass,  and  will  then  take  his  place  in  the  front 
rank  ;  the  lieutenant  colonel,  adjutant,  major,  ser- 
geant major,  ami  the  nmwc  will  place  themselves  be- 
fore the  front  rank,  and  face  to  the  rear,  each  oppo- 
site his  place  in  the  line  of  battle — the  first  two  pass- 
ing around  the  right,  and  the  others  around  the  left 
of  the  battalion. 

55.  At  the  thii-d  C(»nnnand,  the  battalion  will  face 
about;  tlu^  ca[)tains  and  coverintf  serg<'ants  obseiT- 
ing  what  is  prescribed  in  the  sehixd  of  the  c(>mpany 
No.  70. 

56.  The  battalion  facing  thus  by  the  rear  rank,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  diiferent  fires  by 
the  same  commands  as  if  it  were  faced  by  the  front 
rank. 

57.  The  right  and  left  wings  will  retain  the  same 
designati<»ns,  although  faced  about;  the  companies 
also  will  preserve  their  former  designations,  as  Jirst, 
second,  third,  6cc. 

58.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of 
each  company,  luiw  become  the  right. 

59.  The  fire  by  rank  will  commence  by  the  front 
rank,  now  become  the  rear  rank.  This  rank  will 
preserve  its  denomination. 

60.  The  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  color- 
guard  will,  at  the  first  command  given  by  the  co- 
lonel, take  the  places  prescribed  for  them  in  the  fires, 
with  the  front  rank  leading. 

61.  The  colonel,  after  firing  to  the  rear,  wishing  to 
face  the  battalion  to  its  proper  front,  will  cmnmaiul : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  L     17 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.    S.   Battalion.     3.  About — 
Face. 

G'2.  At  these  commands,  the  battalion  will  return 
t(i  its  proper  fnmt  by  the  means  prescribed  Nos.  54 
and  55. 

G3.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  most  used  in  war, 
the  colonel  will  give  it  the  preference  in  the  prepara- 
tory exercises,  in  order  that  the  battalion  may  be 
brought  to  execute  it  with  the  greatest  possible  re- 
gularity. 

64.  When  the  colonel  may  wish  to  give  some  re- 
laxation to  the  battalion,  without  breaking  the  ranks, 
he  will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company  Nos.  37  and  38  or  Nos.  39 
and  40. 

65.  "When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  arms  to 
be  stacked,  he  will  bring  the  battalion  to  ordered 
arms,  and  then  command : 

].  Stack— Arms.    2.  Break  ranks.     3.  March. 

66.  The  colonel  wishing  the  men  to  return  to  the 
ranks,  will  cause  attention  to  be  sounded,  at  which 
the  battalion  will  re-form  behind  the  stacks  of 
arms  The  sound  being  finished,  the  colonel  after 
causing  the  stacks  to  be  broken,  will  command  : 

Battalion. 


18     SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  11. 

67.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  fix  their  atten- 
tion, and  remain  immovabie. 

PART  SECOND. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in  battle  to 

the  order  in  column. 

Article  First. 

To  break  to  the  right  or  the  left  into  column. 

68.  Lines  of  battle  will  habitually  break  into 
column  by  company  ;  they  may  also  break  by  division 
or  by  platoon. 

69.  It  is  here  supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to 
break  by  comi)any  to  the  right ;  he  will  command  : 

1.   By  company,  right  ichcel.      2.  Marcji  (or  double 
quick — March). 

70.  At  the  first  command,  each  cjiptain  will  place 
himself  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  his  company,  and 
caution  it  that  it  has  to  wheel  to  the  right ;  each  cov- 
ering sergeant  will  re-place  his  captain  in  the  front 
rank. 

71.  At  the  command  march,  each  company  will 
break  to  the  right,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  173;  each 
captain  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed 
f  A  l1;«' chiefs  of  platoon;  the  left  guide,  as  soon  as 
he  can  pass,    will   phice  himself  on   the  left   of  the 


iiiUMSiiMaT 


'W'Z^" 


WM^- 


'MWiM^' 


mmMT 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II.  19 

front  rank  to  conduct  the  marching  flank,  and  when 
be  shall  have  approached  near  to  the  perpendicular, 
the  captain  will  command:  1.  Such  company.  2. 
Halt. 

72.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  left  guide  shall  be  at  the  distance 
of  three  paces  from  the  perpendicular,  the  company 
will  halt ;  the  guide  will  advance  and  place  his  left 
arm  lightly  against  the  breast  of  the  captain,  who 
will  establish  him  on  the  alignment  ofthemanwho 
has  faced  to  the  right ;  the  covering  sergeant  will 
place  himself  correctly  on  the  alignment  on  the 
right  of  that  man;  which  being  executed,  the  captain 
will  align  his  c(»mpany  by  the  left,  command  Front, 
and  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre. 

7.3.  The  captains  having  commanded  Front,  the 
guides,  although  some  of  them  may  not  be  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  preceding  guides,  will  stand  fast,  in 
order  that  the  error  of  a  company  that  has  wheeled 
too  much  or  t(»o  little  may  not  be  propagated  ;  the 
guides  not  in  the  direction  will  readily  come  into  it 
when  the  column  is  put  in  march. 

74.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into 
column  by  company  to  the  left,  according  to  the  same 
princij)les,  and  by  inverse  means;  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  each  company  will  conduct  the  marching 
flank,  and  the  left  guid'e  will  place  himself  on  the  left 
of  the  front  rank  at  the   moment  the  company  halts. 

75.  When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division,  the  in- 
dication (/ivisioti  will  be  substituted  in  the  commands 
for  that  oi' company  ;  the  chief  of  each  division  (the 
senior  captain)  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  pre- 


20  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IL 

scribed  for  the  chief  of  company,  and  will  place  him- 
self two  paces  before  the  centre  of  his  division  ;  the 
junior  captain,  if  not  already  there,  will  place  him- 
self in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies  in 
the  front  rank,  and  be  covered  by  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company  in  the  rear  rank.  The 
right  guide  of  the  right  company  will  be  the  right 
guide,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company,  the  left 
guide  of  the  division. 

76.  When  the  battalion  shall  break  by  platoon  to 
the  right  or  to  the  left,  each  first  lieutenant  will  pass 
around  the  left  of  his  company  to  place  himself  in 
front  of  the  second  phitoon,  and  for  this  purpose  each 
covering  sergeant,  except  the  one  of  the  right  com- 
pany, will  step,  for  the  moment,  in  rear  of  the  right 
file  of  his  company, 

77.  When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division  to  the 
right,  and  there  is  an  odd  company,  the  captnin  of 
this  company,  (the  left),  after  wheeling  into  column, 
will  cause  it  to  oblique  to  the  left,  halt  it  at  company 
distance  from  the  preceding  division,  place  his  left 
guide  on  the  direction  of  the  column,  and  then  align 
his  company  by  the  left.  When  the  line  breaks  by 
division  to  the  left,  the  odd  company  will  be  in  front ; 
its  captain,  having  wheeled  it  into  column,  will  cause 
it  to  oblique  to  the  right,  halt  it  at  division  distance 
from  the  division  next  in  the  rear,  place  his  right 
guide  on  the  direction  of  the  other  guides,  and  align 
the  company  by  the  right. 

78.  The  battalion  being  in  column,  the  lieutemant 
colonel  and  major  will  place  themselves  on  the  di- 
recting flank,  the  first  abreast  with  the  leading  sub- 


SBHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II.     21 

division,  and  the  other  abreast  with  the  hist,  and 
both  six  paces  from  the  flank.  The  adjutant  will  be 
near  the  lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  sergeant  major 
near  the  major. 

70.  The  colonel  will  have  no  fixed  place  as  the  tn- 
s<r«f^or  of  his  battalion  ;  but  in  columns  composed  of 
many  battalions,  he  will  place  himself  habitually  on 
the  directing  flank  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  the 
guides,  and  abreast  with  the  centre  of  his  battalion. 

80.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  move  the 
column  forward  without  halting  it,  he  will  caution  the 
battalion  to  that  effect,  and  command : 

1.  By  company    right    tchecl.     2.  M.\RCH  (or  double 
quick — March  j. 

81.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  com- 
panies will  execute  what  is  prescribed  for  breaking 
into  column  from  a  halt. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  they  will  remain  in 
front  of  their  companies  to  superintend  the  move- 
ment ;  the  companies  will  wheel  to  the  right  on  fixed 
pivots  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company  No. 
185 ;  the  left  guides  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
above  ;  when  they  shall  arrive  near  the  perpendi- 
cular, the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  M\RCn.     5.   Guide  left. 

83.  At  the  third  command,  each  covering  sergeant 
will  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  the  man  on 


22  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IL 

the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  his  conipnnj-.  At  the 
ft>urth  ooinmiuul,  which  will  he  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  cjunpleted,  the  companies  will  cease  to 
wheel  and  march  straight  forward.  At  the  fifth,  the 
men  will  take  the  tonch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The 
leading  guide  will  inarch  in  the  direction  indicated  to 
him  hy  the  lieutenant  colonel.  The  guides  will  im- 
mediately conf(»rm  themselves  to  the  principles  of  the 
march  in  column,  school  of  the  company.  No.  200  and 
foUoW'ing. 

84.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  wheel  to  the  right  or  left, 
by  the  same  ccmimands  and  the  same  means  ;  but  he 
should  previously  caution  the  battalion  that  it  is  to 
continue  the  uiarch. 

85.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into 
column  by  company  to  the  left,  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means ;  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  each  company  wmII  conduct  the  marching 
flank,  and  the  left  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the 
left  of  their  respective  companies  at  the  command 
fonrard. 

86.  When  a  battalion  has  to  prolong  itself  in  column 
tow^ards  the  right  or  left,  or  has  to  direct  its  march 
in  column  perj)endicularly  or  diag(nially  in  front,  or 
in  rear  of  either  flank,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to 
break  by  company  to  the  right  or  left,  as  has  just 
been  prescribed ;  but  when  the  line  breaks  to  the 
right,  in  order  to  march  towards  the  left,  or  the  re- 
verse, the  colonel  will  command  :  Break  to  the  right 
to  march  to  the  left,  or  break  to  the  left  to  march  to  the 
right,  before  giving  the  c(mimand,  by  compaiuj,  right 
(or  left)  wheel.  As  soon  as  the  battalion  is  broken, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  w-ill  place  a  marker  abreaat  with 


^ 


p.^. 


"'-ry'-' 

'^ 

^' 

rp" ■"■ 

r?'* 

^ 'Hi»»iiiiiiiir 

r? -'^lilis!^!iiiM^:fiir 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II  23 

the  right  j^uido  of  the  leading  company.  The  inst^iut 
the  eoliirnn  is  put  in  motion,  this  company  will  wheel 
to  the  left  (<tr  right)  march  ten  paces  to  the  front 
without  changing  the  guide,  and  wheel  again  to  the 
left  ((»r  right  j  The  second  wh«'el  being  comi)leted, 
the  captain  will  immediately  command  guide  left  (or 
rifr/it.)  The  guide  of  this  company  will  march  in  a 
direction  parallel  to  the  guides  of  the  column.  The 
lieutenant  colonel  will  be  careful  to  place  a  second 
marker  at  the  point  where  the  first  company  is  to 
change  direction  the  second  time. 


Article  Second. 

To  break  to  the  rear,  hy  the  right  or  left,  into 
column,  and  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies. 

87.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  the  bat- 
talion to  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  into  column 
by  company,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into  column. 
2.  Battalion  right — FACE.  3.  MARCH  for  double 
quick — M\RCh;. 

>^.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  (»f  his  company,  and  cau- 
ti<tn  it  to  face  to  the  right ;  the  covering  sergeants 
will  step  into  the  front  rank. 


24  SCHOOL  OF  THE  HATTAMON— PART  H. 

89.  At  tbe  second  coniniand,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right ;  each  caj)tain  will  hasten  to  the  right  of 
his  ccnnpany,  and  break  two  files  to  the  rear;  the  first 
file  will  break  the  whole  depth  of  the  two  ranks  ;  the 
second  file  less  ;  which  being  executed,  the  captain 
will  place  himself  so  that  his  breast  may  touch  light 
ly  the  left  arm  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  last  file 
iu  the  company  next  on  the  right  of  his  own.  The 
captain  of  the  right  company  will  place  himself  as  if 
there  were  a  company  on  his  right,  and  will  align 
himself  on  the  other  captains.  The  covering  sergeant 
of  each  company  will  break  to  the  rear  with  the  right 
files,  and  place  himself  before  the  front  rank  of  the 
first  file,  to  conduct  him. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  each 
company  will  wheel  to  the  right ;  the  covering  ser- 
geant, placed  before  this  file,  will  conduct  it  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  rear.  The  other  files  will  come  suc- 
cessively to  wheel  on  the  same  spot.  The  captains 
will  stand  fast,  see  their  ciuupanies  file  past,  and  at 
the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have  wheeled,  each  cap- 
tain will  command : 

1.  Such  company.     2.  Halt.     3.  FiiOXT.     4.  Left — 
Dress. 

91.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front, 
its  left  guide  will  place  himself  so  that  his  left  arm 
may  touch  lightly  the  breast  of  his  captain. 

92.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  company  will  align 
itself  on  its  left  guide,  the  captain  so  directing  it, 


SCHOOL  UK  THE  BATTALION— PART  IL  25 

that  the  new  alignment  may  be  perpendicular  to  that 
which  the  company  had  occupied  in  line  (»f  battle, 
and,  the  better  to  judge  this,  he  will  step  back  two 
paces  from  the  flank. 

93.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command:  FRONT,  and  take  his  place  befor%  its 
centre. 

1)4.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when 
the  coh)nel  shall  wish  to  break  into  column  by  com- 
pany, to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Bif  the  riirht  of  companies  to  the  rear  into  column. 
2.'  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank.  3.  MarCII  for 
double  quick— MmiCH). 

95.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  step 
briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company,  and 
caution  it  to  face  by  the  right  flank. 

96.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right ;  each  captain  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
right  of  his  company  and  cause  it  to  break  to  the 
right;  the  first  file  of  each  company  will  wheel  to 
the  right,  and  the  covering  sergeant  placed  in  front 
of  this  file  will  conduct  it  perpendicularly  to  the  rear; 
the  other  files  will  wheel  successively  at  the  same 
place  as  the  first.  The  captains  will  see  their  com- 
panies file  past  them  ;  when  the  last  files  have  wheel- 
ed, the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.   Battalion,  by  the  left  flank— ^IaRCH. 
4.   Guide  Uft. 


23  SCHOOL  ON  THI-:  BATTALION— PART  IL 

97.  At  tlip  coimnand  march,  the  companies  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  inarch  in  cctlnmn  in  the  new  di- 
rection. The  caj)tains  will  place  themselves  in  front  of 
the  centres  of  their  resnective  companies.  At  the 
fourth  command,  the  guides  will  conform  to  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  march  in  column ;  the  leading  one  will 
move  in  the  direction  indicated  to  him  by  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  el- 
bows to  the  left. 

98.  To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  the  colonel 
will  give  the  same  commands  as  in  the  case  (»f  break- 
ing to  the  rear  by  the  right,  substituting  the  indica- 
tion left  for  that  of  right. 

99.  The  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles.  Each  captain  will  hasten  to  the 
left  of  his  comyjany,  cause  the  first  two  files  to  break 
to  the  rear,  and  then  place  his  breast  against  the  right 
file  of  the  company  next  on  the  left  of  his  own,  in  the 
manner  prescribed  above. 

100.  As  soon  as  the  two  files  break  to  the  rear,  the 
left  guide  ()f  each  company  will  place  himself  before 
the  front  rank  man  of  the  headmost  file,  to  conduct 
him. 

101.  The  instant  the  companies  face  to  the  front, 
the  right  guide  of  each  will  place  himself  so  that  his 
right  arm  nuiy  lightly  touch  the  breast  of  his  captain. 

102.  The  battalion  may  be  broken  by  division  to 
the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  in  like  manner;  in  this 
case,  the  indication  divisions  will  be  substituted,  in 
the  first  command,  for  that  of  companies;  the  chiefs 
of  division  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed for  the  chiefs  of  company.  The  junior  cap- 
tain in  each  division  will  place  himself,  when  the  di- 


PCIIOOL  OF  THE  HATTALI'  N— PART  II.  27 

vision  faces  to  a  flank,  by  tlie  side  of  tin-  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company,  who  steps  into  tlie  front 
rank. 

103.  If  tliere  be  an  odd  number  of  c(»mpanies,  and 
the  battalion  l)reaks  by  division  to  the  rear,  whether 
by  the  right  or  left,  the  captain  of  the  left  company 
will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  77. 

104.  This  manner  of  breaking  into  column  being  at 
once  the  most  ])ronipt  and  regular,  will  be  preferred 
on  actual  service,  unless  there  be  some  particular 
reason  fttr  breaking  to  the  front. 

105.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line  and  at  a  halt,  and 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the 
right  of  companies,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  front  (or  rear). 
2.  Battalion,  right— Face.  3,  March  (or  double 
quick — March).  4.  Guide  right  (left)  or  cen- 
tre.) 

106.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
rapidly  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  com- 
pany, and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right;  the  cover- 
ing sergeants  will  replace  the  captains  in  the  front 
rank. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  each  captain  moving  quickly 
to  the  right  of  his  company  will  cause  files  to  break 
to  the  front,  according  to  the  principles  indicated 
No.  89. 

108.  At  the  command  march,  each  captain  placing 
himself  on  the  left  of  his  leading  guide  will  conduct 
his  company  perpendicularly  to  the  original  line.    At 


28  SCUJOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II. 

the  fourth  cominHnd,  the  guide  of  each  company  will 
dress  to  the  right,  left,  or  centre,  according  to  the  in- 
dication given,  taking  care  to  preserve  accurately  his 
distance. 

109.  If  the  colonel  should  v^'ish  to  move  to  the 
front,  or  rear,  by  the  left  of  companies,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  the  same  means  and  the 
same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right. 

110.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  of  com- 
panies, he  will  command : 

I.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  front  (or  rear) 
2.  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank.  3.  MARCH  (or 
double  quick — MauCH).  4.  Guide  right  {left)  or 
(centre). 

111.  Which  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  and  means  prescribed  Nos.  95  and  follow- 
ing, and  lOG  and  following.  At  the  first  command, 
the  C(dor  and  general  guides  will  take  their  places  as 
in  column. 

112.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  re 
tire  by  the  left  of  companies,  the  movement  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  means  and  the  same  com- 
mands, substituting  left  for  right. 

113.  If  the  battalion  be  advancing  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to 
form  line  to  the  front,  he  will  command : 

1.  By    companies   into   line.      2.  Mauch  (or   double 
quick — March).     3.   Guide  centre. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  RATTALI   N— PART  H.  29 

114.  At  the  conimnnd  viarch,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  cai)t}iins,  each  conipany  will  be  formed  into  line, 
as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  compaDy,  No.  154. 

115.  At  the  third  coniniand,  the  color  and  general 
guides  will  move  rapidly  to  their  places  in  line, 
as  will  be  hereinafter  prescribed  No.  405. 

116  If  the  battalion  be  retiring  by  the  right  or 
left  of  comjiauies,  and  the  c<donel  shoJild  wish  to 
form  line  facing  the  enemy,  he  will  first  cause  the 
companies  to  face  about  while  marching,  and  imme- 
diately form  in  line  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed Nos.  113  and  following. 


Article  Third. 


To  ploy  the  battalion  into  dose  column. 


117.  This  movement  may  be  executed  by  company 
or  by  division,  on  the  right  or  left  subdivision,  or  on 
any  other  subdivision,  right  or  left  in  front. 

118.  The  examples  in  this  scho(d  will  suppose  the 
presence  of  four  divisions,  with  directions  for  an  odd 
company;  but  what  will  be  prescribed  for  four,  will 
serve  equally  for  two,  three  or  five  divisions. 

110.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column  by 
division  in  rear  of  the  first,  the  colonel  will  command: 


30  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  H. 

1.  Close  column,  hy  dirision.      2.    On  the  Jirst  dici- 

sion,  right  in  front.      3.    Battalion,    right — Fack. 

4.  March  (or  double  quick— }^1\rcu). 

120.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  chiefs  of 
division  will  place  themselves  before  the  centres  of 
their  divisions;  the  chief  of  the  first  will  cantion  it 
to  stand  fast;  the  chiefs  of  the  three  t»thers  will  re- 
mind them  that  they  will  have  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
the  cdveriiig  sergt'ant  of  the  right  Cdmjjany  of  each 
division  will  replace  his  captain  in  the  front  rank,  as 
soon  as  the  latter  steps  out. 

121.  At  the  third  connnand,  the  last  three  divi- 
sions will  face  to  the  right;  the  chief  of  each  division 
will  hasten  to  its  right,  and  cause  files  t(»  be  broken 
to  the  rear,  as  ijidicated  No.  iid;  the  right  guide  will 
break  at  the  same  time,  and  place  himself  before  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  first  file,  to  conduct  him,  and 
each  chief  of  division  will  place  himself  by  the  side 
of  this  guide. 

122.  The  moment  these  divisions  face  to  the 
right,  the  junior  captain  in  each  will  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company, 
who  will  place  himself  in  the  tnmt  rank.  This  rule 
is  general  for  all  the  ploymcnts  by  division. 

123.  At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  add,  guide  left ;  at  this,  its  left  guide 
will  place  himself  on  its  left,  as  soon  as  the  move- 
ment of  the  second  divisicm  may  permit,  and  the  file 
closers  will  advance  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 


~>^ 


FiPi 


ri^.3. 


i3i 


p  j^- 


^ 


HiiiiwiiiniHiniiimmiMr -■-., 

TlBlilMllHlllMllllllllllWlllir 
IMMMllllllillHIliiillllllliig 


Hiiiiiai'';,''!''W''T,;''Piiiiiiir 


4t:f;ii':'L,v:ii„H" 


w 


m;iiiHMiMiiiiiniv.^.iiiiii— 


^■llWlMill 


4il||lllllllMiHllllllMilli 


r^iiiiiiiiiiiiHiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiir 


1^^^=^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  liATTALr  N— PART  H.  31 

124.  All  the  other  divisions,  each  conducted  by  its 
chief,  will  step  off  together,  to  tnlie  their  places  in 
the  column;  the  second  will  gjiin,  in  wheeling  by 
file  to  the  rear,  the  space  of  six  paces,  w  hich  ought 
to  separate  its  guide  from  the  guide  of  the  first  di- 
vision, and  so  direct  its  march  as  to  enter  the  column 
on  a  line  paral]«'l  to  this  division  ;  the  third  and  fourth 
divisions  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  towards, 
but  a  little  in  rear  of,  the  points  at  which  they  ought, 
respectively,  to  enter  the  column  ;  at  six  paces  from 
the  left  flank  of  the  column,  the  head  of  each  of  these 
divisions  will  incline  a  little  to  the  left,  in  order  to 
enter  the  column  as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
seccuid,  taking  care  also  to  leave  the  distance  of  six 
paces  between  its  guide  and  the  guide  <tf  the  pre- 
ceding divisicui.  At  the  moment  the  divisicuis  put 
themselves  in  march  to  enter  the  c<dumn,  the  file 
cbtsers  of  each  will  incline  to  the  left,  so  as  to  bring 
tlu-niselves  to  the  distance  tif  a  pace  from  the  rear 
rank. 


125.  Each  chief  of  these  three  divisions  will  con- 
duct his  division  till  he  shall  be  up  with  the  guide  of 
the  directing  one;  the  chief  will  then  himself  halt, 
see  his  division  file  past,  and  halt  it  the  instant  the 
last  file  shall  have  passed,  commanding:  1.  Such  di- 
vision; 2.  Halt;  :5.  Front:  4.  Left — Dkess. 


126.  At  the  second  command, the  division  will  halt; 
the  left  guide  will  place  himself  jnomptly  on  the  di- 
rection, six  paces  from  the  guide  \\  Inch  precedes  bin), 
in  order  that,  the  column  being  formed,  the  divisions 
may  be  separated  ihe  distance  ol'  four  paces. 


32     SCHOOL  (IF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IL 

127.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  face 
to  the  front;  at  the  fourth,  it  will  be  aligned  by  its 
chief,  who  will  i)liic(!  himself  two  yiu-va  outside  of  his 
guide,  and  direct  the  alignment  so  that  his  division 
may  be  parallel  to  that  which  precedes — which  being 
done,  he  \\\\\  command.  Front  and  place  himself 
before  the  centre  of  his  division. 

123.  If  any  division,  after  the  c<muiiand//-o«^  be 
not  at  its  proper  distance,  and  this  can  only  happen 
through  the  negligence  of  its  chief,  such  division  will 
remain  in  its  place,  iu  order  that  the  fault  may  not  be 
propagated. 

129.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  execution  of 
the  movement,  and  cause  the  prescribed  principles  to 
be  observed. 

130.  The  Lieutenant  colonel,  placing  himself  in  suc- 
cession in  rear  of  the  left  guides,  will  assure  them  ou 
the  direction  as  they  arrive,  and  then  move  to  his 
place  outside  of  the  left  flank  of  the  column  six  paces 
from,  and  abreast  with,  the  first  division.  In  as- 
suring the  guides  on  the  direction,  he  will  be  a  mere 
observer,  unless  one  or  more  should  fail  to  cover  ex- 
actly the  guide  or  guides  already  established.  This 
rule  is  general. 

131.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  left  of  the  fourth  division,  and  afterwards 
take  his  position  outside  of  the  left  flank  of  the  col- 
umn, six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  this  division. 

132.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  front  of  the  first  divi- 
sion, the  C(donel  will  give  the  same  commands,  sub- 
stituting the  indication  left  for  that  of  right  in  front. 


tiCIIouL  OF  THE  15ATTALKN— PART  II.  33 

133.  At  the  srcdiul  niid  third  coiiiniaiuls,  tin*  chiefs 
of  division  Hiid  the  junior  cajitains  \\  ill  conform  theni- 
selves  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  1*20,  121,  1*22;  \mt 
the  chiefs  (d'  the  last  three  (livisions,  instead  of  caus- 
ing the  first  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  will  caupe 
them  to  break  to  the  front. 

134.  At  the  fourth  cianniand,  the  chief  of  th(!  first 
divisi(»n  will  add  :   (tuide  right. 

r'.ri.  The  three  other  divisions  w  ill  step  off  together 
t<»  take  thfir  places  in  the  C(dnnin  in  front  (»f  the  di- 
recting division  ;  each  will  direct  itstdf  as  ])rescribed, 
N<>  1*24,  and  will  enter  in  such  manner  that,  when 
halted,  its  guide  may  find  himself  six  paces  from  the 
guide  of  the  division  next  previously  established  in 
the  C(dunin. 

13C.  Each  chief  of  these  divisions  will  conduct  his 
division,  till  his  right  guide  shall  be  nearly  up  with 
the  guide  of  the  directing  one;  lie  will  then  halt  his 
divisicui,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front;  at  the  in- 
stant it  halts,  its  right  guide  will  (ace  to  the  rear, 
place  himself  six  i)aces  from  the  preceding  guide, 
and  cover  him  exactly — which  being  done,  the  chief 
will  align  his  division  by  the  right. 

]'A7.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  in  front  of  the 
right  guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the  guides 
on  the  direction  as  the\  successively  arrive,  and  then 
move  outside  of  the  right  flank  <»f  the  cidumn,  to  a 
])oint  six  paces  fr<tm,  and  abreast  vvilh,  the  fourth  di- 
vision, now  in  front. 

138.  The  major  will  conform  himself  to  what  is 
prescribed,  ^o.  131,  and  tlun  move  <  utside  of  the 
right  flank  ol  the  column,  six  paces  from,  and  abreast 
with,  the  first  division,  now  in  the  r«  ar. 


.14  sen  >"L  <iF  THE  HATTALI   N-PART  II. 

]:V.y  Tlic  iiiovt'iiu'iit  bciiif;  oiidcd,  tl;*'  Cdlmiel  will 
coiiiiiiiiiitl : 

(iiiidcs,  about — Fack. 

14<».  At  this,  tlie  guides,  \\\u)  are  faced  to  tiie  rear, 
will  face  to  the  front. 

141.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  rear,  or  in  front  of  the 
fourth  division,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

I.  Close  column  by  dicision.  2.  On  the  fourth  dici- 
rision,  left  (or  right)  in  front.  8.  Battalion,  left — 
Fack.    4.  March  (or  double  quirk— yi.MiCu). 

142.  These  movements  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  i)rinci|)les  of  those  which  precede,  but  by  in- 
verse ni«'ans:  the  fourth  division  on  which  the  bat- 
talion ]>lo}s  will  stand  fast;  the  instant  the  nntvement 
commences,  its  chief  will  connnand,  truidc  right  [or 
leftl 

14".^.  The  fon'^oinfj  examples  embrace  all  the  prin- 
ciples: thus,  when  the  c<doiiel  shall  wish  to  phty  the 
battalion  on  an  interior  division,  he  will  command: 

1.  (lose  column  by  division.  2.  On  such  dicision, 
right  (or  left  in  front.  I?.  Battalion  imcards — 
Fact,.     4.  Maiich  (or  double  quick — March). 

114.  The  instant  the  movement  commences,  the 
chief  of  the  directing  division  will  counnand,  guide 
lift  {ov  right). 

145.  The  divisioTis  which,  in  the  order  in  battle, 


SCH  '   L  ('F  THE  BATTALI'N— PART  II.  .'15 

are  to  the  right  of  the  directing  division,  will  face  to 
the  left;  those  which  are  to  the  left,  will  face  to  the 
right. 

146.  If  the  right  is  to  be  in  front,  the  right  divi- 
sions will  ploy  in  front  of  the  directing  division,  and 
the  left  in  its  rear;  the  reverse,  if  the  left  is  to  be  in 
front.  And  in  all  the  foregoing  suppositions,  the  di- 
vision or  divisions  c<tntigtions  to  the  directing  one,  in 
wheeling  by  file  to  the  fr<)nt  or  rear,  will  gain  the 
space  of  six  i)aees,  which  ought  to  separate  their 
guides  from  the  guide  of  the  directing  division, 

147.  lu  all  the  ploynients  on  an  interior  division, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of  the 
guides  in  front,  and  the  major  those  in  the  rear  of  the 
directing  division. 

148.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a 
halt,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  combining 
the  two  gaits  of  quick  and  diuible  quick  time,  and  al- 
ways in  rear  of  one  of  the  flank  divisions. 

149.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  in  rear 
of  the  first  division,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Close  column  by  diiision.  2.  On  the  first  division. 
3.  Battalion — by  the  right  flank.  4.  Double  quick 
—March. 

150.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division 
will  move  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  his  division 
and  caution  it  to  face  t(»  the  right. 

151.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  ife 
to  continue  to  march  to  the  front^  and  he  will  com- 
mand:   Quick  march. 


36  SCH'X  L  OF  THE  BATTALION-PART  II. 

152.  At  the  coniniiiiul  inarch,  tlio  chiof  of  the  first 
division  will  coiuiiuiiul :  (hiidc  left.  At  this,  the  left 
guitk'  will  m(»ve  to  the  Irft  fijiiik  of  the  division  and 
direct  himself  on  the  j)oiiit  indicated. 

153.  The  three  other  divisions -will  face  to  the  right 
and  move  oif  in  double  quick  time,  breaking  to  the 
riglit  to  take  their  jtlaces  in  column ;  each  chief  of 
division  will  nM)ve  rapidly  to  the  right  of  his  division 
in  order  to  conduct  it.  The  files  will  be  careful  to 
preserve  their  distances,  and  to  march  with  a  uniform 
and  decided  step.  The  ctdor-bearer  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places  in  the  ranks 

154.  The  second  division  Avill  immediately  enter 
the  C(dumn,  marching  paralk'l  to  the  first  division; 
its  chief  will  allow  it  to  file  past  him,  and  when  the 
last  file  is  abreast  of  him,  will  c«imnuind  :  1.  Second 
division,  hy  the  left  flank — March  2.  Guide  left, 
and  place  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  divi- 
sion. 

155.  At  the  command  march,  the  division  will  face 
to  the  left;  at  the  second  command,  the  left  guide 
will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  left  guide  of  the  first 
division ;  the  men  will  take  the  toucli  of  elbows  to 
the  left.  When  the  second  division  has  closed  to  its 
proper  distance,  its  chief  will  conmiand:  Qiiicli  time 
— March.  This  division  will  then  change  its  step  to 
quick  time. 

156.  The  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions 
will  «'xecute  their  nu)vements  according  to  the  same 
principles,  taking  care  to  gain  as  much  ground  as 
possible  towards  the  head  of  the  column. 

157.  If  the  battalion  had  been  previously  marching 
in  line  at  double  quick  tinu',  when  the  fourth  division 


3CEIOOL  OF  TIIK  BATTALION— PART  111.  37 

shall  have  gained  its  distanco,  tlio  colonel  will   eom- 
raaiul :   Douhlr  quick — MARCH. 

158.  In  tliis  movement,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
move  rapidly  t(»  the  side  of  the  leading  guide,  give 
him  a  point  of  direction,  and  then  follow  the  move- 
ments of  the  first  division.  The  ni;ijor  will  follow 
the  movement  abreast  with  the  left  oi"  the  fourth  di- 


Rcmarlis  on  ploying  the  battalion  into  column. 

150.  The  battalion  may  be  ployed  into  c<dumn  at 
full,  or  half  distance,  on  the  same  principles,  and  by 
the  same  commands,  substituting  for  the  first  com- 
mand:  Column  at  full  (or  half)  distance  by  division. 

160.  In  the  ployments  and  movements  in  column, 
when  the  subdivisions  execute  the  movements  suc- 
cessively, such  as — to  take  or  close  distances  ;  to 
change  direction  by  the  flank  of  subdivisions,  each 
chief  of  subdivision  will  cause  his  men  to  support 
arms  after  having  aligned  it  and  commanded,  Front. 


PART  THIRD. 
Article  First. 

To  inarch  in  column  at  full  distance. 

161.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  put  the  col- 
umn in  march,  he  will  indicate  to  the  leading  guide 
two  distinct  (tbjects  in  front,  on  the  line  which  the 
guide  ought  to  follow.     This  guide  will  immediately 


3«  .SCHOOL  OF  THE  HATTAl.ION— I'AIIT  IM. 

put  bis  shoulders  in  a  8(]U!ire  \\itb  tlint  line,  take  the 
more  distant  ol)jeet  as  the  point  of  direction,  and 
the  nearer  one  as  the  intermediate  point. 

162.  If  only  a  sinsle  prominent  object  present  itself 
in  the  direction  the  guide  has  to  follow,  he  will  face 
to  it  as  before,  and  immedi;itely  endeavor  to  catch  on 
the  ground  some  intermediate  ])oint,  by  which  to 
give  steadiness  to  his  march  on  the  point  of  direction. 

103.  There  being  no  ])rominent  object  to  serve  as 
the  i)(»int  of  direction,  the  citlonel  will  dispatch  the 
lieutenant  c(»lonel  (»r  adjutant  to  place  himself  forty 
paces  in  advance,  facing  the  column,  and  by  a  sign  of 
the  sword  establish  him  on  the  direction  he  may  wish 
to  give  to  the  leading  guide;  that  officer  being  thus 
placed,  this  guide  will  take  him  as  the  point  oi  direc- 
tion, conforming  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company.  No.  87. 

164.  These  dispositions  being  mad<',  the  colonel 
will  c<Mnmand: 

1.    Ci'lnmn  fonrnrd.      2.     Guide  left  (oYri'^ht).       3. 
Maiu:h  (or  double  quick— MaRCU). 

105.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  sulxlivision,  the  column  will  i)ut  itsell'in 
march,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  conii)any  No.  '200  and  lollowing. 

100.  The  leading  guide  may  always  maintain  him- 
self correctly  on  the  direction  by  keeping  steadily  in 
view  the  two  ])oints  indicated   to  bin),   or  chosen  by 


J£. 


Fi^.l 


R=Z 


1. 1j y„ 


-  ^.?/  ■ 


^_L_.  ZD^ 


^ 


Fiif2'. 


:^_- y 


a-'t-f^ 


Fjs.o. 


SCIIOOI-  OF  TIIK   BATTALION— PART  III.  33 

liimsclf;  if  th«*se  jxtints  havci  ji  certain  ol«'Viition,  he 
iiiiiy  b«*  iissuivd  he,  in  on  the  tni  direction,  \\  L»mi  the 
nciiivr  masks  tho  nv>ro  distant  point. 

]()7.  Tlio  folWtwing  yuidcs  will  proservt'  \\itli  ex- 
actness both  step  and  (listaiMM^ ;  each  will  inarch  in 
the  trace  of  th(^  guide  who  ijimiediately  precedes 
bim,  without  occupying  himself  with  the  general  di- 
rection. 

]C)!^.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  hold  himself,  ha- 
bitually, abreast  with  the  leading  guide,  to  sec  that 
he  diK's  not  deviat<'  from  the  direction,  and  will  (»b- 
serve,  also,  that  the  next  guide  inarches  exactly  in 
the  trace  of  the  first. 

109.  The  major  will  generally  be  abreast  with  the 
last  subdivision;  he  will  see  that  each  guide  marehcB 
exactly  in  the  trace  (»f  the  one  immediately  preced- 
ing; if  either  deviate  trom  the  direction,  the  major 
will  pr«»m])tly  rectify  the  ernu',  and  prevejit  its  being 
propagated:  but  he  need  not  interf<M"e,  in  this  way, 
unless  the  deviation  has  become  sensible,  or  material. 

170  The  column  being  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
frci^uently  cause  the  about  to  be  executed  while 
marching:  to  this  effect,  he  will  command  : 

1.     Battalion,  right  about.      2     MARCH.       3.     Guide 
right. 

171.  At  the  second  command,  the  companies  will 
fice  to  the  riglit  about,  and  the  column  will  then 
march  forwanl  in  an  opposite^  direction;  the  chiefsof 
6ubdivisi(»n  w  ill  remain  behind  the  front  rank,  the  file 


40  SCriOOL  OF  TllK  RATTALION— PART  III. 

closers  in  front  of  the  rear  rank,  and  the  pruides  will 
place  themselves  in  the  same  rank.  The  lieutenant 
colonel  will  remain  abreast  of  the  first  division,  now 
in  rear ;  the  major  will  give  a  ]ioint  <»f  direction  to 
the  leading  guide,  and  march  abreast  of  him. 

J72.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  habitually  on 
the  directing  flank  ;  he  \Nill  look  to  tlie  step  and  to 
the  distances,  and  see  that  all  the  princijjles  prescrib- 
ed for  the  march  in  column,  school  vi'  the  company, 
are  observed. 

173.  These  means,  which  the  practice  in  that 
8cho(d  ought  to  have  rendered  familiar,  will  give  suf- 
ficient exactness  to  the  direction  of  the  ccdumn,  and 
also  enable  it  to  i'm-m  forward  or  faced  the  rear,  on  the 
right,  or  on  the  left,  into  line  of  battle,  and  to  close  in 
mass. 

174.  But  when  a  column,  arriving  in  front,  or  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  or,  rather,  on  one  of  the 
extremities  of  that  line,  has  to  ])rolong  itself  on  it,  in 
order  to  form  to  the  left  or  to  the  right  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, then,  as  it  is  essential,  to  prevent  the  column 
from  cutting  the  line,  or  sensibly  deviating  from  it, 
other  means,  as  follows,  will  be  employed. 

The   column  arriving  in  front  of  the  line  of  battle,  to 
prolong  it  on  this  line. 

175.  If  the  column  right  in  front  arrive  in  front  of 
the  line  of  battle,  as  it  should  cross  it  and  find  itself 
four  paces  beyond  it  after  having  changed  direction, 
the  colonel  will  cause  to  be  jdaced,  in  advance,  a 
marker  on  the  line  to  indicate  the  point  at  which  the 


SCHOOL  OF  TIIH  RATTAMON— PAItT  III.  41 

column  oupht  to  cross  it,  find  anotbcr  miirkor  to  indi- 
cate the  point  where  thi;  tirst  subdivision  shduhl  com- 
mence to  wheel;  he  will  he  so  placed  that  when  the 
wheel  is  executed,  the  h'f>  ^Miide  will  find  hiins<'lf  f(»nr 
paces  within  tho  line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  the 
leading  subdivision,  when  the  head  of  the  colunni 
ghall  have  arrived  lu^ar  the  line,  will  take  the  guide 
to  the  right,  and  this  guide  will  immediately  direct 
himself  on  the  sectuid  marker.  On  arriving  abreast 
of  him,  this  subdivision  will  be  wheeled  to  the  left, 
and  when  the  wheel  is  completed,  the  guide  will  be 
clianged  again  to  the  left;  this  guide  will  then  march 
parallel  to  the  line  of  battle  by  the  means  to  be  here- 
inafter iudicated. 

176.  The  instant  the  first  subdivision  wheels,  the 
right  genoral  guide,  who,  by  a  caution  from  the  lieu- 
tenant C(»lonel,  will  before  have  placed  himself  on  the 
line  of  battle  at  the  point  where  the  column  crosses 
it,  and  who  will  have  faced  to  the  two  points  of  di- 
rection in  his  front,  indicated  by  the  colonel,  will 
march  forward  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  those 
points. 

177.  The  color-bearer  will  place  himself  in  like 
manner  <»n  the  line  of  battle;  and,  at  the  instant  the 
color  subdivision  wheels,  he  will  i)rolong  his  march 
on  that  line,  abreast  with  this  subdivisi(ui,  taking  care 
to  carry  the  color-lance  before  the  centre  of  his  per- 
son, and  to  maintain  himself  exactly  in  the  direction 
of  the  general  guide  who  precedes  him,  and  the  point 
of  dirt'ctiou  in  front  which  will  have  been  indicated 
to  him. 

178.  Finally,  the  left  general  guide  will  place  him- 
self in  the  sauie  manner  on  the  line   of  battle  ;  and, 


42  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BAITALION— PART  HI. 

at  tbe  instant  the  last  subdivision  of  the  battalion 
wheels,  he  will  march  correctly  in  the  direction  of 
the  color-bearer,  and  the  other  general  guide. 

179.  The  guide  of  the  first  subdivision  will  march 
steadily  abreast  with  the  right  general  guide,  and 
about  four  jiaccs  to  his  right;  each  of  the  guides  of 
the  following  subdivisidiis  will  march  in  the  trace  of 
the  guide  who  immediately  precedes  Lim,  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  167. 

180.  The  c(»lonel,  ])laced  outside  of  the  general 
guides,  will  see  thiit  the  c(»lumn  marches  nearly  par- 
allel to,  and  about  four  paces  within  these  guides. 

181.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  major  will  lo()k  to 
the  direction  <»f  the  geneial  guides,  and  to  this  end, 
place  themselves  souietimes  in  rear  of  the  cohu'-bear- 
er,  or  the  left  general  guide. 

182.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  l)attal- 
ions,  the  general  guides  of  each  will  successively 
place  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle  to  prolong  their 
march  on  this  line,  as  the  leading  subdivision,  that  of 
the  col(»r,  aiul  the  one  in  the  rear  of  their  battalion, 
shall  wheel  into  the  new  direction  ;  these  guides  will 
coutorm  themselves  respectively,  as  will  also  the  colo- 
nel, lieutenant  colonel,  and  major,  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed above  for  those  of  the  leading  battalion. 

183.  In  the  case  of  several  ])attalioiis,  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel  of  each  will  n)aiMtain  steadily  the  guide 
of  his  leading  subdivision  about  four  paces  within  the 
line  of  general  guides,  even  should  the  last  subdivi- 
sions (»f  the  battalion  inuuediately  pieceding  deviate 
from  the  pai-allelism,  in  order  that  the  false  directum 


SCHOOL   OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  III.  43 

of  one  battiili(»n  niny  iu»t  iiifluonco  that  of  tlio  Imttal- 
ioiiB  which  follow. 

The  column  arriving  behind  the  line  of  battle,  to  pro- 
long it  on  this  line. 

]r'4.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  arrive  behind 
the  line  of  battle,  as  it  ought  to  find  itself  four  pacoH 
within  this  line,  after  having  changed  direction,  the 
colonel  will  cause  a  inarker  to  be  placed  at  the  point 
where,  according  to  that  conditi(ui,  the  first  subdivi- 
sion ought  to  commence  whcM'liug.  Another  marker 
will  be  established  on  the  line  of  battle,  to  indicate 
the  point  at  which  the  general  guides  ought,  in  suc- 
cession, to  begin  to  prolong  themselves  on  that  line; 
he  will  be  so  placed  that  each  subdivision,  having 
finished  its  wheel,  may  find  itself  nearly  in  a  line 
with  this  marker. 

J 85.  At  the  instant  the  first  subdivision,  after  hav- 
ing wheeled  to  the  right,  begins  to  prolong  itself, 
parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle,  the  leading  genera] 
guide,  i)laeed  in  advance  on  that  line,  will  direct  him- 
self on  the  two  points  taken  in  bis  front;  the  color 
bearer  and  the  other  general  guide  will  successively 
plice  themselves  on  the  same  line  the  instant  that 
their  respective  subdivision  shall  have  finished  their 
wheel. 

186.  If  the  column  be  comiK)sed  of  several  bat- 
talions, the  general  guides  <tf  the  following  battalions 
will  successively  execute  what  has  been  just  pre- 
scribed for  those  of  the  leading  battalion,  and  the 
whole  will  conform  themselves,  as  well  as  the  guides 
of  subdivisions,   and  the  field  officers  of  the  several 


44  SCHOOL  OF  TIIK  BATTALION— PART  IIL 

battalions,  to  what  is  indicated,  above,  for  a  column 
arriving  in  front  of  a  line  of  battle. 

187.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  arriving  in  front  or 
in  rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  these  movements  will  be 
executed  on  the  same  i)riuciples,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

The  coliiDin  arriving  on  the  right  or  the  left  of  the  line 

of  battle,  to  prolong  it  on  this  line. 

188.  If  the  column,  instead  of  arriving  in  front  «>r 
in  rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  arrive  on  its  right  or  left, 
and  if  it  have  to  prolong  itself  on  that  line,  in  order 
afterwards  to  form  to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of 
battle,  the  colonel  will  bring  the  color  and  general 
guides  on  the  flank  of  the  column  by  the  command 
color  and  general  guides  on  the  line  :  and  these  guides 
will  prolong  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed  above. 

Manner  of  prolonging  a  line  of  battle  by  markers. 

189.  When  a  column  pndongs  itself  on  the  line  of 
battle,  it  being  all-important  that  the  general  guides 
march  correctly  on  that  liu  •,  it  becomes  necessary 
that  c<donels,  lieutenant  colonels,  and  majors,  whose 
duty  it  is  to  maintain  the  true  direction,  should  be 
able  to  see,  as  far  as  practicable,  the  two  objects,  on 
which  the  march  of  the  geneial  guides  ought  to  be 
directed;  consequently,  when  no  prominent  objects 
present  themselves  in  the  desired  direction,  the  chief 
of  the  column  will  supply  the  want  of  them  in  ad- 


SCIJCOL  OF  TIIK  I'.ATTALION— PAirr  HI.  45 

vance  by  aids-de-cjimp,  or   other   motintcd  officers, 
and  in  such  number  as  may  be  necessary. 

190.  Three  such  officers  may  prolong  a  line  as  far 
as  may  be  desired  in  the  following  manner:  they 
will  place  themselves  in  advance  on  th«'  line  <»f  bat- 
tle, the  tirst  at  the  point  where  the  head  of  the 
column  ought  to  enter;  the  second,  three  or  four  hun- 
dred paces  behind  the  tir^t,  and  the  third,  a  like  dis- 
tance behind  the  second  The  first  of  these  officers 
will  remain  in  position  till  the  leading  general  guide 
shall  have  entered  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  then,  at 
a  gallop,  place  himself  at  a  convenient  distance  be- 
hind the  third.  The  second  will  do  the  like  in  re- 
spect to  the  tirst,  when  the  head  of  the  column  shall 
be  near  him,  and  so  on  in  continuation.  These  officers, 
without  dismounting,  will  face  to  the  colunu),  and 
cover  each  other  accurately  in  file.  It  will  be  on 
them  that  the  general  guitlcs  will  steadily  direct  their 
march,  and  it  will  be  so  much  the  more  easy  for  the 
latter  to  maintain  themselves  on  the  direction,  as 
they  will  always  be  able  to  see  the  mounted  officers 
over  the  heads  of  the  preceding  guides;  thus  the  de 
viation  from  the  direction,  by  one  or  more  general 
guides,  need  not  mislead  those  whotolhjw. 

191.  A  single  mounted  officer  may  suffice  to  assure 
the  directi«»n  of  a  column,  when  the  pt>int  of  direc- 
tion towards  which  it  marches  is  very  distinct.  In 
this  case,  that  officer  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of 
bat  le  within  that  point,  and  beyond  the  one  at  which 
the  head  of  the  column  wiH  halt,  and  remain  in  posi- 
tion till  the  column  halts;  serving  thus  as  the  inter 
mediate  p<»int  f<u'  giving  steadiness  to  the  march  of 
the  general  guides. 


4G  SCHOOL  OF  TIIK  BATTALION-PART  III. 

192.  For  a  column  of  one  or  two  battalions,  mark- 
ers on  foot  will  sntfiee  to  indicate  the  line  to  be  fol- 
lowed by  the  general  guides. 


licinarks  on  the  march  in  column. 


10:V  Altbough  the  nncad<Miced  step  be  that  of 
colunnis  in  route  niarebes,  and  also  that  wliieli  ought 
to  be  habitually  employed  in  the  Evolutions  oj  the 
Line,  because  it  leaves  the  men  mcu'e  at  ease,  and, 
consequently,  is  better  adapted  to  movements  on  n 
large  seale  and  to  ditTicult  gr  unds,  nevertheless,  as 
it  is  of  paramount  importance  to  confirm  soldiers  in 
the  measure  and  the  movement  of  the  cadenced  pace, 
the  route  step  will  be  but  little  practised  in  the  ex- 
ercises by  battalion,  except  in  g«»iug  to,  and  return- 
ing from,  the  ground  of  instruction,  and  for  teaching 
the  mechanism  and  movements  of  columns  in  route. 

]94.  It  is  highly  essential  to  the  regulaiity  of  the 
march  in  column  that  each  gui  ie  iollow  exactly  in 
the  trace  of  the  one  immediately  jjreceding,  without 
occupying  his  attention  with  the  general  direction  of 
the  guides.  If  this  principle  be  steadily  observed, 
the  guides  will  find  themselves  aligned,  provided  that 
the  leading  one  march  exactly  in  the  direction  indi- 
cated to  him;  and  even  should  obstaeles  in  his  way 
force  him  into  a  momentary  deviation,  the  direction 
of  the  column  would  not  necessarily  be  changed  ; 
whereas,  if  the  following  guides  endeavor  to  conform 
themselves  at  once  to  all  t  e  movements  of  the  lead- 
ing one,  in  order  to  cover  him  in  file,  such  endeavors 
would  necessarily  cause  corresponding  fluctuations 


XZ- 


■alfiec 


-A 


f 


JLSL 


ie=        \ 


f ^-,J 


i         ! 
I        i 


.SCHOOL  OK  TilK  RAITAF, ION— PART  III.  47 

...  the  (•(('uinn  from  right  to  left,  and  from  left  to 
right.  ;iii<l  render  the  preservation  of  distanees  ex- 
tremely diflieult. 

lO.j.  As  a  eons<'<iuenee  of  the  principh*,  that  each 
Suhlc  shall  rmrthj  follow  in  the  (race  of  the  one 
irho  iinmciliatily  precedes,  if,  pending  tiu;  march  (tfthe 
cohimn,  the  co  one!  shall  give  a  new  point  of  direc- 
tion, t(»o  near  to  the  first  to  require  a  formal  change 
«»f  directitdi,  the  leading  guide,  advancing  the  one  or 
the  <»ther  shouider,  wi:l  immediately  direct  himself 
on  this  point;  the  other  guides  will  only  conform 
themselves  to  this  movement  as  each  arrives  at  the 
pi'int  at  which  the  first  had  executed  it.  Each  sub- 
livi.^itin  will  conform  itself  to  the  movement  of  its 
guide,  the  men  insensih'y  lengthening  or  shortening 
tin'  stej),  and  advancing  or  refusing  (throwing  back) 
tin'  shou  der  <»pposite  to  the  guide,  but  without  losing 
the  touch  of  the  eibow  towards  his  side. 

196.  The  column,  by  company,  being  in  march,  the 
!(»nel  will  cause  it  to  diminish  front  by  platoon, 
Irom  front  to  rear,  at  once,  and  to  increase  front  by 
platoon  in  like  manner,  which  movements  will  be 
commanded  and  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  company,  Nos.  282  and  27:3  and  following, 
changing  the  command /orm  company  to  form  compa- 
nies. 8o  may  he  increase  and  diminish,  or  diminish 
and  increase  front,  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  at  once,  by  company,  changing  the  command 
form  companies  to  form  divisions,  and  the  command 
break  into  platoons,  to  break  into  companies.  In  this 
case,  the  companies  and  divisions   will  execute   wh.it 


48  SCHOOL  <  F  TUK  nATTAl-K'N-rAUT  III. 

is  prescribed  for  platoons  and  companies  respectively. 

]07.  Tlie  column  being  at  a  bait,  if  the  colonel 
8hou!d  wish  to  march  it  to  the  rear,  and  the  distance 
to  be  gained  be  so  inconsiderable  as  to  render  a  coun- 
termarch a  dispro])«»rtionate  lo^s  of  time,  he  will 
cause  the  column  t(t  face  about,  and  then  put  it  in 
march  by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  1(54;  the 
chiefs  of  the  subdivisions  will  remain  behind  the 
front  rank,  the  file  closers  before  the  rear  rank,  and 
the  guides  will  step  into  the  rear  rank,  now  in  front. 
In  a  column,  l)y  divisi<in,  the  junior  captains,  in  the 
intervals  between  companies,  will  replace  their  cov- 
ering sergeants  in  tlie  rear  rank,  and  these  sergeants 
will  step  into  the  line  of  file  closers  in  front  of  their 
intervals. 


Akticlk  Second. 
Column   in  route. 


198.  A  colunm  in  route,  like  a  column  in  ma- 
noeuvre, ought  never  to  have  a  depth  greater  than 
about  the  front  it  had  occupied  in  the  line  of  battle, 
less  the  front  of  a  subdivi6ic»n. 

199.  The  observance  of  this  principle  re(}uire8  no 
particular  rule  for  a  column  in  manoeuvre:  but,  as  a 
colunm  in  route  may  have  hourly  to  pass  narmw 
ways,  bi-idges,  or  other  defiles,  rendering  it  necessniy 
to  diminish  the  front  of  subdivisions,  it  becomes  im- 
portant to  give  rules  and  means  bv  wbicli  the  column 
may,   for  any  length  of  march,   prestu've  the  ease  of 


SCII'>()L  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.  49 

the  route  step  \viih(»ut  elongation  from  front  to  rear. 

200.  A  coluiun  in  route  will  be  habitually  formed 
by  comi^any. 

201.  When  a  eolumii  in  route  shall  arrive  at  a  pass 
too  ^arro^^'  to  receive  the  front  of  a  company,  the 
column  will  diminish  front  by  platoon  before  enter- 
ing. This  movement  will  be  executed  successively, 
or  by  all  the  conipanies  at  once. 

202.  If,  however,  the  deiile  be  very  short,  and  it 
may  be  passed  by  the  diminution  of  a  few  files,  it 
will  be  preferable  to  break  to  the  rear  the  limited 
number  of  files. 

203.  The  column  being  by  platoon,  and  the  want 
of  space  rendering  a  further  diminution  of  front  ne- 
cessary, it  will  be  diminished  by  section,  if  the  pla- 
toons be  of  twelve  or  m()re  files. 

204.  The  column  being  by  section,  will  continue  to 
march  by  that  front  as  long  as  the  defile  may  permit. 

205.  If  the  platoons  have  less  than  twelve  files, 
one  or  two  files  will  be  broken  to  the  rear,  according 
to  the  narrowing  of  the  defile,  and  the  route  step  con- 
tinued as  long  as  six  files  can  march  abreast. 

206.  What  has  just  been  explained  for  breaking 
files  to  the  rear  in  a  column  by  platoon,  is  equally  ap- 
plicable to  a  column  by  section. 

207.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  permit  six  men 
to  march  abreast,  the  subdivisions  will  be  marched 
successively  by  the  fl;mk,  conf(»rming  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed NoF.  :il4  and  3 J. 5,  school  of  the  company. 

208.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  will  be 

4 


50  SCH  >t'L  «'F  TilE  RATTALloN— PART  III. 

formed  into  c<ilmnn,  by  soctidii,  by  platoon,  or  by 
C()n)piiiiy,  as  soon  as  tlio  brcadtb  of  Ibo  way  may 
permit;  tbo  scvt'i'al  movements  wbicb  tbese  forma- 
tions inelude  will  b»'  exeented  by  tbe  eommands  of 
the  caj)tains,  as  tbeir  eompanies  sueeessively  clear 
the  defile,  observing  the  following  rules. 

209,  As  soon  as  tbe  way  is  sufticiently  broad  to 
contain  »ix  men  al)reast.  the  captain  will  command  : 


1.   Ihj  srctivii  (vvhy  platoon)  into  line.     2.  March. 


21(1.  At  the  command  march,  tbe  subdivisions  in- 
dicated will  form  themselves  into  line;  the  files 
which  have  not  been  able  to  enter,  will  follow  (by 
the  flunk)  the  last  four  files  of  their  subdivision  which 
have  entered  into  line. 

211.  The  column  marching  in  this  order,  the  files 
in  rear  will  be  caused  to  ent(>r  into  line  as  the  in- 
creased bieadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

212.  The  colunm  marching  by  section  or  by  pla- 
toon, platoons  or  conipanies  will  be  formed  as  soon 
as  the  breadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

21.'?.  The  leading  subdivision  will  follow  the  wind- 
ings of  the  pass  or  defile  ;  the  fullovving  subdivisions 
will  not  occujjy  themselves  with  tbe  direction,  but 
all,  in  succession,  pass  over  the  trace  of  the  subdivi- 
sions which  precede  them  respectively.  The  men 
will  not  seek  to  avoid  the  bad  parts  of  the  way,  but 
pass,  as  far  as  practicble,  each  in  the  direction  of 
bis  file. 

214.  Changes  of  direction  will  always  be  made 
without    comuiand  ;  if  ILo  change  be   important,  a 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BAITALION— PART  III.  51 

caution  merely  from  the  respective  chiefs  to  their 
Bubdivisioiis  will  suffico,  and  the  rear  rank,  as  well  as 
the  tiles  broken  to  the  rear,  will  execute  successively 
the  movement  where  the  front  rank  had  executed  it. 


215.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of 
the  battalion  ;  he  will  regulate  the  step  of  the  lead- 
ing subdivision,  and  indicate  to  its  chief  the  instant 
for  executing  the  various  movements  which  the  na- 
ture of  the  route  may  render  necessary. 


210.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  bat- 
talions, each  will  conform  itself,  in  its  turn,  to  what 
shall  have  been  commanded  for  the  leading  battalion, 
observing  to  execute  each  movement  at  the  same 
place,  and  in  the  same  manner. 


217.  Finally,  to  render  the  mechanism  of  all  those 
movements  familiar  to  the  troops,  and  to  habituate 
them  to  march  in  the  I'oute  step  without  elongating 
the  column,  commanders  will  generally  cause  their 
battalions  to  march  in  this  step,  going  to,  and  return- 
ing from,  fields  of  exercise.  Each  will  occasionally 
conduct  his  battalion  through  narrow  passes,  in  order 
to  make  it  perceive  the  utility  of  the  principles  pre 
scribed  above  ;  and  he  will  several  times,  in  every 
course  of  instruction,  march  it  in  the  route  step,  and 
cause  to  hfi  executed,  sometimes  at  once,  and  some- 
times successively,  the  divers  movements  which  have 
just  been  indicated. 


52  SCHOOL  OF  TlIK  BATTALION— PART  III. 


General  rcmarlis  on  tfie  column  in  route. 

218.  The  lesson  relative  to  the  eoliimn  in  route  is, 
by  its  frequent  ai)i)liciiti()n,  one  of  the  most  important 
that  can  be  ^iven  to  troops.  If  it  be  not  well  taught 
and  established  on  right  principles,  it  will  happen 
that  the  rear  of  the  C(»lumn  in  route  will  be  obliged 
to  run,  to  regain  distances,  or  that  the  front  will  be 
forced  to  halt  till  the  rear  shall  have  accctmplished 
that  object;  thus  rendering  the  march  greatly  slower, 
or  greatly  more  fatiguing,  generally  both,  than  if  it 
were  executed  according  to  rule. 

219.  The  ordinarj'  progress  t>f  a  colunui  in  route 
ought  to  be,  on  good  roads  or  good  grounds,  at  the 
rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  i)aces  in  a  minute.  This 
rate  may  be  easily  maintained  by  columns  of  almost 
any  depth ;  but  over  bad  roads,  ploughed  fields,  loose 
gauds,  or  mountainous  districts,  the  progress  cannot 
be  so  great,  and  must  therefore  be  regulated  accord- 
ing to  circumstances. 

220.  The  most  certain  means  of  marching  well  in 
route,  is  to  preserve  always  a  reguhir  and  equal 
movement,  and,  if  obstacles  oblige  one  or  m<»re  sub- 
divisions to  slacken  or  to  sh<u-ten  the  step,  to  cause 
the  primitive  rate  of  march  to  be  resumed  the  mo- 
ment the  difRcuties  are  passed. 

221.  A  subdivisi«u)  ought  never  to  take  more  thau 
the  prescribed  distance  from  the  subdivision  im- 
mediately preceding ;  but  it  is  sometinu^s  necessary 
to  lessen  that  distance. 

222.  Thus:  the  head  of  the  column  encounters  an 
obstacle  which  obliges  it  to  rehix  its  march;  all  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IIL  53 

following  subdivisions  will  preserve  the  habitual  step, 
and  close  up  in  mass;  if  necessary,  on  the  subdivisi(»n 
nearest  to  the  obstacle  Distances  will  afterwards 
naturally  be  recovered  as  each  subdivision  shall  suc- 
cessively have  passed  the  obstacle.  Nevertheless,  if 
the  ditficulty  be  too  great  to  be  overcome  by  one  sub- 
division, whilst  the  next  is  closing  up,  so  that  dis- 
tances cannot  afterwards  be  recovered  without  run- 
ning, the  chief  of  the  column  will  halt  the  leading 
subdivision  beyond  the  obstacle,  at  a  distance  suffi- 
cient to  contain  the  whole  column  in  mass.  He  will 
then  put  the  column  in  march,  the  subdivisions  taking 
distances  by  the  head,  observing  to  commence  the 
movement  in  time,  so  that  the  last  subdivision  may 
not  be  obliged  to  halt,  after  having  cleared  the  ob- 
stacle. 

223.  When  the  chief  of  a  column  shall  wish  to 
change  the  rate  of  march,  he  will  cause  the  leading 
battaliiui  to  (juicken  or  to  relax  the  step  insensibly, 
and  send  orders  to  the  other  battalions  each  to  regu- 
late itself  by  that  which  precedes  it. 

224.  The  column  being  composed  of  several  bat-* 
talions,  the  general-in-chief  will  always  leave  an  aid" 
de-camp  with  its  rear  to  bring  him  prompt  informa- 
tion if  it  find  a  difficulty  in  following. 

22.5.  Subdivisions  ought  always  to  step  out  well  in 
obliquing,  both  in  breaking  and  f(»rming  companies  or 
platoons.  When  either  is  d(nie  in  succession,  it  is 
highly  important  that  no  subdivision  slacken  or  shorten 
the  step  whilst  that  which  precedes  it  is  engaged  in 
the  movement.  The  observance  of  this  principle  can 
alone  prevent  an  elongation  of  the  column. 

226.  If  the  battalion,  marching  by  the  flank,  en- 


54  SCHOOL  OF  THE  EAITALION— PART  HI. 

counter  a  pass  so  narrow  as  to  oblige  it  to  defile  with 
a  front  «»f  two  men,  the  coh»nerwill  order  support 
arms,  t;ike  the  cadenced  step,  and  undouble  the  files, 
whicli  will  l»e  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  schocd  of 
company,  No.  '.\26;  the  files  will  double  again  as  soon 
as  the  bi-eadth  of  the  way  will  permit. 

227.  If  the  defile  be  only  sufficient  to  receive  a 
front  of  one  man,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  men  to 
pass  one  at  a  time.  The  men  of  the  same  file  should 
follow  each  other  in  their  order  as  closely  as  possible, 
and  without  loss  of  time.  As  soon  as  the  defile  per- 
mits a  front  of  two  or  f<»ur  men,  the  battalion  will  be 
re-formed  into  two  or  four  ranks,  and  will  march  in 
this  order  until  there  be  space  to  form  platoons  or 
sections,  as  indicated  No.  209. 

228.  In  both  cases,  just  supposed,  the  head  of  the 
battalion,  after,  having  passed  the  defih%  will  march 
till  sufficient  space  be  left  to  contain  the  wh(»le  of  the 
subdivisions  in  mass ;  afterwards  it  will  be  put  in 
^narch  by  the  means  indicated  No.  222. 

229.  When  a  command  has  to  move  rapidly  over  a 
given  distance,  the  movements  prescribed  in  this 
article  will  be  executed  in  double  quick  time  ;  if  the 
distance  be  long,  the  chief  o(  the  c(dumn  will  not 
allow  the  march  at  this  gait  to  be  continued  for  more 
than  fifteen  minutes;  at  the  end  of  this  lime,  he  will 
order  the  ordinary  route  step  to  be  marched  for  five 
minutes,  and  then  again  resume  the  double  quick.  If 
the  ground  be  uneven,  having  considerable  ascents 
and  descents,  he  will  reserve  the  double  quick  for 
those  parts  of  the  ground  most  favorable  to  this 
march. 


'^     T!lIli:ii?'iESii| 


lKi!JE!F.'«r 


\. 


i'^mFmT' 


HCIIOOL  OK  TIIK  BATTALION— PART  III.  55 

230.  A  c<tliiniii  inn  veiling  iiltrniiitel}'  in  dduble 
quick  tiino  and  tiic  (>i-(liii;iry  r«»utp  step,  in  the  man- 
ner stated,  can  easily  accomplish  very  lone;  dis- 
tances in  a  very  sliort  space  of  time;  but  when  the 
distance  to  l)e  ])assed  ttver  l)e  not  great<"r  than  two 
miles,  it  (»Mirht  to  he  aecomjilislied,  when  the  ground 
is  favorable,  without  changing  the  rate  of  march. 


Article  Third. 


To  change    direction   in    column  at  full    distance. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march  in  the  cadenced 
stej),  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change 
directi<in,  lie  will  go  to  the  point  at  which  the  change 
ought  to  be  commenced,  and  establish  a  marker 
there,  presenting  the  breast  to  the  flank  of  the  col- 
umn ;  this  marker,  no  matter  to  which  side  the 
change  of  direction  is  to  be  made,  will  be  posted  on 
the  opposite  side,  and  he  will  remain  in  position  till 
the  last  subdivision  (»f  the  battalion  shall  have  passed. 
The  leading  subdivision  being  within  a  few  paces  of 
the  marker,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


Head  of  column  to  the  left   for  right). 

2'.>2.  At  this,  the  chief  of  the  leading  subdivision 
will  immediately  take  the  guide  on  the  side  opposite 
the  change  of  direction,  if  not  already  there.  This 
guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  graze  the  breast  of 
the  marker;  arrived  at  this  point,  the  chief  will  cause 
his  subdivisiou  to  change  direction  by  the  commands 


56  SCHOOL  OF  TIIK  ILATTALION— I^UIT  III 

and  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the 
Bchool  of  the  company.  When  the  wheel  is  com- 
pleted, the  chief  of  this  sulHlivision  will  retake  the 
guide,  if  changed,  on  the  side  of  the  primitive  direc- 
tion. 

233.  The  chief  of  each  succeeding  subdivision,  as 
well  as  the  guides,  will  conform  to  what  has  just 
been  explained  for  the  leading  subdivision. 

234.  The  coh)nel  will  carefully  see  that  the  guide 
of  each  subdivision,  in  wheeling,  does  not  throw  him- 
self without  or  within,  but  passes  over  all  the  points 
of  the  arc  of  the  circle,  which  he   ought  to  describe. 

235.  As  often  as  no  distinct  object  presents  itself 
in  the  new  direction,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  place 
himself  upon  it  in  advance,  at  the  distance  of  thirty 
or  foi-ty  paces  from  the  marker,  and  be  assured  in 
this  directitin  by  the  colonel ;  the  leading  guide  will 
take,  the  moment  he  shall  have  cliangcd  dii-ectiitn, 
two  jxtints  on  tht;  ground  in  the  straight  line  which, 
drawn  fn»m  himself,  wttuld  pass  between  the  heels  of 
the  lieutenant  colonel,  taking,  afterwards,  new  points 
as  he  advances. 

236.  The  major  will  see  that  the  guides  direct 
themselves  on  the  marker  posted  at  the  point  of 
change,  so  as  to  graze  his  breast. 

237.  If  the  column  be  ccmiposed  of'  several  battal- 
ions, the  lieutenant  colonel  (»f  the  second,  will  cause 
the  marker  of  the  first  battalion,  to  be  rephiced  as 
soon  as  the  last  subdivision  of  this  battalion  shall 
have  passed  ;  this  disposition  will  be  observed  by  bat- 
talion after  battalion,  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III  r.T 


Remarks. 

238.  It  has  been  demonstrated,  schocd  of  the  Ciun- 
panj%  how  important  it  is.^r.s/,  that  each  subdivision 
execute  its  change  of  direction  pn'cisely  at  the  point 
where  the  leading  one  had  changed,  and  that  it  ar- 
rive in  a  s([uare  with  the  direction  ;  second,  that  the 
wheeling  pi.int  <iught,  always,  to  be  cleared  in  time, 
in  order  that  the  subdivision  engaged  in  the  wheel  may 
not  arrest  the  movement  of  the  following  (»ne.  The 
deeper  the  column,  the  more  rigorously  ought  these 
principles  to  be  observed ;  because,  a  fault  that  would 
be  but  slight  in  a  column  of  a  single  battalion,  would 
cause  much  embarrassment  in  one  of  great  depth. 


Article  Fourth. 

To  halt  the  column. 

230.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  thf  colonel 
shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Column.     2    Halt, 

240.  At  the  second  command,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  column  will  halt;  no  guide  will  stir, 
though  he  may  have  lost  his  distance,  (>r  be  out  of  the 
direction  of  the  preceding  guides. 

247.  The  column  being  in  march,  in  double  quick 
time,  will  be  halted  by  the  same  commandB.     At  the 


58  SCHOOL  ON  THE  BATTALION— PART  Hh 

comiiiitiul  halt,  the  men  will  halt  in  their  places,  and- 
will  themselves  rectify  their  positions  in  ihe  ranks. 

242.  The  column  being  halted,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  he  will  n)ove 
a  little  in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  and  face  t(t  him; 
this  guide  and  the  folk>wing  one  will  fix  their  eyes  on 
the  cdlonel,  in  order  promptly  to  conform  themselves 
to  his  directions. 

243.  If  the  colonel  judge  it  not  necessary  to  give  a 
general  direction  to  the  guides,  he  will  limit  himself 
to  rectifying  the  position  of  such  as  may  be  without, 
or  within  the  direction,  by  the  cnmmand  truidc  of 
(such)  company,  or  guides  of  (such)  companies,  to 
the  right,  (or  tu  the  left ; )  at  this  command,  the  guides 
desigmited  will  place  themselves  on  the  direction  ; 
the  others  will  stand  fast. 

244.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  colonel  judge  it  ne" 
cessary  to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  o^ 
the  column,  he  will  place  the  first  two  on  the  direc- 
tion he  shall  have  chosen,  and  comnuind  : 


Guides,  cover. 

245.  At  this,  the  following  guides  will  pnmiptly 
place  themselves  on  the  direction  covering  the  first 
two  in  file,  and  each  precisely  at  a  distance  equal  to 
the  front  of  his  company,  from  the  guide  immedi- 
diately  preceding  ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure 
them  in  the  direction,  and  the  colon*?]  will  command: 


Left,  Cor  right)— BreS:'. 


SBIIOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION- PART  111.  69 

246.  At  this  command,  each  company  will  incline 
to  the  right  or  left,  and  dress  forward  or  backward, 
80  a8  to  bring  tlie  designated  flank  to  rest  on  its 
guide  ;  each  captain  will  place  himself  two  paces 
outside  of  his  guide,  promptly  align  his  company 
parallelly  with  that  which  precedes,  then  command 
Fron^  and  return  to  his  place  in  column. 

247.  Finally,  if  the  general  guides  march  on  the 
flank  of  the  column,  the  colonel,  having  halted  it, 
W'ill  place  himself  in  rear  of  the  color  bearer,  to  as- 
certain whether  the  leading  general  guide  and  the 
color-bearer  be  exactly  on  the  direction  of  the  two 
points  in  advance,  and  establish  them  on  that  direc- 
tion if  they  be  not  already  ()n  it;  the  major  will  do 
the  like,  in  respect  to  the  general  guide  in  the  rear ; 
which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


J.  Gwirfcs— On  the  line. 

248.  At  this  cmnmaiid,  the  guide  of  each  company 
of  the  directing  flank  will  step  promptly  into  the  di- 
rection of  the  general  guides,  and  face  to  the  front. 
The  lieutenant  C(tlonel,  placed  in  front  of,  and  focing 
to,  the  leading  general  guide,  and  the  major,  placed 
in  rear  of  the  rearmost  one,  will  promptly  align  the 
company  guides. 

249.  The  colonel,  having  verified  the  direction  of 
the  guides,  will  command  : 

Left  (or  nV/jf)— Dress. 

250.  This  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  246. 


60  t^CIIOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III. 


Rauarks. 

251.  The  means  indicated,  No.  244,  and  following;, 
for  ^iviii}!  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of  «  col- 
umn, ;it  full  distance,  will  apply  only  to  a  column 
composed  of  two,  or,  at  most,  three  battalions.  If 
the  number  be  more  numerous,  its  chief  will  cause 
the  colors  and  general  guides  of  all  the  battalions  to 
step  out  and  place  themselves  on  the  directi<m  which 
he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  column,  as  is  explained  in 
the  evolutions  of  the  line. 

Article  Fifth. 

To  close  the  column  to    half  distance,  or  in   mass. 

252.  A  colutnn  by  company  being  at  full  distance 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance,  on  the  lead- 
ing company,  he  will  comm  ind : 

1.   To  half  distance,  close  column.      2.  MARCH  Cor 
double  quick — March  J. 

253.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the 
leading  company  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast. 

254.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  re- 
peated by  all  the  captains,  except  the  captain  of  the 
leading  company,  this  cojupany  will  stand  fast,  and 
its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left ;  the  file  closers  will 
close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 


FCHOOL  UK  THE  BATTALION— PyUrr  III.  01 

255.  All  the  (ttber  coinpnnies  will  cctutinup  to 
inarch,  and  as  each  in  sTiccosKion  arrives  at  platoon 
tlistaiice  from  the  one  which  precedes,  its  captain  will 
halt  it. 

25(5.  At  tlie  instant  that  each  compnnv  halts,  its 
yuidc  will  phice  hini.sclfon  the  direct  ion  oi"  the  guides 
who  precede,  and  thec.iptain  will  align  the  company 
hytUeleft;  the  lile  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon 
the  rear  rank. 

257.  No  particular  attention  need  be  given  to  the 
general  direction  of  the  guides  before  they  respec- 
tively halt;  it  will  suffice  if  each  follow  iu  the  trace 
of  the  one  who  precedes  him. 

258.  The  c<»lonel,  <m  the  side  of  the  guides,  will 
supciinlend  the  execution  of  the  mcnemeiit,  observ- 
ing that  the  c'iptains  halt  their  companies  exactly  at 
])latoon  distance  the  one  from  the  other. 

250.  The  lieutenant  ccdonel,  a  few  paces  in  front, 
will  face  to  the  leading  guide  and  assure  the  posi- 
tions of  the  following  guides  as  they  successively 
place  themselves  on  the  direction. 

260.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  last  guide. 

261.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  c(donel  will 
cause  it  to  close  by  the  same  commands. 

262.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  at  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  command  quick  time;  the  chiefs  ot 
the  other  companies  will  caution  them  to  continue 
their  march. 

263.  At  the  c(»inmand  march,  the  leading  company 
will  inarch  in  quick,  and  the  other  companies  in 
double  quick  time  ;  and  as  each  arrives  at  platoon 


62  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III 

distanco  from  the  procediiig  one,  its  cbiof  will  cause 
it  to  inarch  in  qnick  time. 

i>64.  Wbe-i  the  rearmost  company  shall  have  gain- 
ed its  distance,  the  colonel  will  command : 


Donhlc  quick— ISlxRCll. 

265.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  the  column 
and  to  cause  it  to  close  to  halt  distance  at  the  same 
time,  he  will  notify  the  captain  of  the  leading  com- 
pany of  his  intention,  who  at  the  command  march  will 
halt  his  ciimpany  and  align  it  by  the  lett. 

2(5(5.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and 
the  colonel  should  not  give  the  c(»mmand  double 
quick,  the  captain  (»f  the  leading  ci»nipany  will  halt 
his  company  at  the  connnand  march,  and  align  it  by 
the  left.  In  the  case,  where  the  coU»nel  adds  the 
command  double  quick,  the  captains  of  companies 
will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  262,  and  the 
movement  will  be  executed  as  indicated  No.  263. 

To  close  the  column  on  the  eighth,  or    rearmost 
company. 

267.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  instead  of  caus- 
ing it  to  close  to  half  distance  on  the  first  company, 
the  colonel  should  wisli  to  cause  it  to  close  ou  the 
eighth,  he  will  command : 

I .  On  the  eighth  company,  to  half  distance  close  column. 
2.  Battalion  about — Face.  3.  Column  forward. 
4.  Guide  right.  5.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 


.c~^rr::fr 


llMiIMlliB- 


n — 

P 

4_ 

;- 

-^^P 

y 

qr— 

— p 

'!_ 

T" 

_P 

tr 

~ 

— f 

M 

f^ 

" 

'L_ 



_F 

«--   — 

_..j=i 

■^ 

)-' 

• 

H 

.-_P 

_^ti 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALI  N— PART  III.     03 

268.  At  tin?  second  coinmand,  all  theconipaiiioH  ex- 
cept tlie  cijL^bth,  will  face  a'lout,  and  their  guides  will 
remain  in  the  front  rank,  now  tbe  rear. 

269.  At  the  fourth  c()mmand,  all  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  two  paces  outside  of  their  com- 
panies on  the  directing  flank. 

270.  At  the  command  march,  the  eighth  company 
will  stand  fast,  and  its  captain  will  align  it  l>y  the 
lelt,  the  other  companies  will  put  themselves  in 
march,  and,  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  fmm 
the  one  established  before  it,  its  captain  will  halt  it 
and  face  it  lo  the  front.  At  the  moment  that  each 
comp;niy  halts,  the  left  guide,  remaining  fa<'ed  to  the 
rear,  will  phice  himself  pmmptly  on  the  direction  of 
the  guides  already  estal)lished.  Immediately  aft<M-, 
the  captain  will  align  his  company  by  the  left,  and 
the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  on  the  rear  rank. 
If  this  movement  be  executed  in  double  quick  time, 
each  captain,  in  turn,  will  halt,  and  command  ;  Suck 
company,  riirfit  about — Halt.  At  this  command,  th*; 
company  designated  will  face  to  the  right  about  and 
halt. 

271.  All  the  companies  being  aligned,  the  colonel 
will  cause  the  guides,  who  stand  faced  to  the  rear, 
to  face  about. 

272  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placing  himself  behind 
the  rearmost  guide,  will  assure  successively  the  posi- 
ti(»ns  of  the  other  guides,  as  prescrilx'd  No.  2')!) ;  the 
major  will  remain  abreast  with  the  rearmost  com- 
pany. 

27;?.  The  c<dumn  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  close  it  on  the  eighth  company,  he  will 
command : 


64  SCIl'.'OL  (F  THi:  P,ATTALIi'N_PARl'  HI. 

1 .   On  the  eighth  company,  to  half  distance,  close  column . 

2.  Battalion  ri<rht    about.      '.).  Makcm    («r   doiible 

quick — March).     4.   Guide  right. 

274.  At  tlu'  fitst  conimaiKl,  the  f;ii)t;iiii  of  the 
eightli  c(»iiii)aiiy  will  caution  bis  eitiupauy  that  it  \vill 
remain  faced  to  the  front;  the  captains  of  the  other 
C(»mpanies  will  caution  their  companies  that  they 
will  have  to  face  about. 

275.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the 
eighth  c(mipany  will  halt  his  company  and  align  it  by 
the  left;  the  file  dof^ers  will  close  one  pace  ujjon  the 
rear  rank. 

276.  The  captains  <»f  the  other  companies,  at  the 
same  command,  will  place  themselves  on  the  flank  of 
the  Cf^lunin  ;  the  subdivisions  will  face  about,  and  as 
each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  company 
immediately  preceding  it,  its  chief  will  face  it  to  the 
front  and  halt  it  as  prescribed  No.  270.  The  instant 
each  company  halts,  the  guide  on  the  directing  flank, 
remaining  faced  to  the  rear,  will  quickly  place  him- 
self on  the  direction  of  the  guides  alreai'y  established. 
After  whii-h,  tlie  captain  will  align  the  cismpany  by 
the  left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon 
the  rear  rank. 

277.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  follow  the  move- 
ment abreast  of  the  first  company.  The  major  will 
place  himself  a  few  paces  in  rear  of  the  guide  of 
the  eighth  comi)any,  and  will  assure  successively  the 
position  of  the  other  guides. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.  65 


Remarks. 

278.  A  column  by  division  at  full  distance  will  close 
to  half  distance  by  the  same  means  and  the  same 
commands. 

279.  A  column  by  company,  or  by  division,  being 
at  full  or  half  distance,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to 
close  in  mass  by  the  same  means  and  commands,  sub- 
stituting the  indication  column,  close  in  mass,  for 
that  of  to  hdlf  distance,  close  column.  Each  chief  of 
subdivision  will  conform  himself  to  all  that  has  just 
been  prescribed,  except  that  he  will  not  halt  his  sub- 
division till  its  guide  shall  be  at  a  distance  of  six 
paces  from  the  guide  of  the  subdivision  next  preced- 
ing. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  these  various  move- 
ments will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

Article  Sixth. 
To  march  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass. 

281.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being 
at  a  halt,  the  cobmel  will  put  it  in  march  by  the  com- 
mands prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

282.  The  means  of  direction  will  also  be  the  same 
for  a  colunm  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  as  for  a  col- 
umn at  full  distance,  except  that  the  general  guides 
will  not  step  out. 

283    A  C(dumn  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being 
in   march,   when   the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he 
5 


66  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-PART  IIL 

will  give  the  commands  prescribccl  for  halting  a  eol- 
uum  at  full  distance,  and  if,  alterwaids,  he  judge  it 
necessary  to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of 
the  C(dunin,  he  will  employ,  to  this  end,  the  com- 
maDds  and  iiie;ius  indicated.  No.  '244  and  following. 

284.  In  columns  at  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass, 
chiefs  of  subdivision  will  repeat  the  commands  march 
and  halt,  as  in  columns  at  full  distance. 


285.  The  cohmel  will  often  march  the  column  to 
the  rear,  by  the  means  and  the  commands  prescribed 
Nos.  17Uandl7J. 

286.  A  column  by  division  or  company,  whether  at 
full  or  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass,  at  a  halt  or 
marching,  can  be  faced  to  the  right  or  left,  and  march- 
ed olf  in  the  new  direction. 


Article  Seventh. 

To  change  direction  in  column  at  half  distance. 

287.  A  column  at  half  distance,  being  in  march, 
will  change  direction  by  the  same  connnands  and  ac- 
cording tt>  the  same  principles  as  a  column  at  full  dis- 
tance ;  but  as  the  distance  between  the  subdivisions 
is  less,  the  j)ivot  man  in  each  subdivision  will  take 
steps  of  fourteen  inches  instead  of  nine,  and  of  seven- 
teen inches  instead  of  eleven,  according  to  the  gait, 
in  order  t(»  clear,  in  time,  the  wheeling  point,  and  the 
inarching  flank  will  describe  the  arc  of  a  larger  cir- 
cle, tlie  better  to  facilitate  the  movement. 


JL- 


JJJL 


<f7r 


F  r 


^H 

—^ — 

~      J-' 

A     _ 

' 

'J 

4 

!■ 

c.;.a 


school  of  the  battalion— part  iii.         67 

Article  Eighth. 

To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass. 

]st.    To  change  direction  in  marching. 

283.  A  column  by  divlsictn,  closed  in  mass,  being  in 
march,  will  change  direction  by  the  front  of  subdivi- 
sions. 

289.  "Whether  the  change  be  made  to  the  reverse, 
or  to  the  pivctt  flank,  it  will  always  be  executed  on 
the  principles  of  wheeling  in  marching;  to  this  end, 
the  colonel  will  first  cause  the  batralion  to  take  the 
guide  on^ie  flank  opposite  to  the  intended  change  of 
direction,  if  it  be  not  already  on  that  flank. 

290.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  right  in 
front,  having  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  the 
colonel,  aft«'r  having  caused  a  marker  to  be  placed  at 
the  point  where  the  change  ought  to  oommeuce,  will 
command : 

U  Battalion,  right  wheel.      2.  March. 

291.  At  the  command  marc/t,  the  leading  division 
will  wheel  as  if  it  were  part  of  a  column  at  half 
distance. 

292.  The  instant  that  this  division  commences  the 
wheel,  all  the  others  will,  at  once,  conform  them- 
selves to  its  movement;  to  this  end  the  left  guide  of 
each,  advancing  slightly  the  left  shoulder  and  length- 
ening a  little  the  step,  will  incline  to  the  left,  and  will 


68  sen  OL  OF  THE  BATTALI   N-PART  IIF, 

observe,  at  the  same  time,  to  gain  so  much  ground  to 
the  front  that  there  may  constantly  be  an  interval  of 
four  paces  between  his  divisicm  and  that  which  pre- 
cedes it;  and  as  soon  as  he  sliall  cover  the  preceding 
guide,  he  will  cease  to  incline  and  then  march  exact- 
ly in  his  trace. 

293.  Each  division  will  conform  itself  to  the  move- 
ment of  its  guide;  the  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow 
towards  him  and  advance  a  little  the  left  shoulder  the 
instant  the  movement  commences  ;  each  file  in  inclin- 
ing, will  gain  so  nuich  the  less  gniund  to  the  front,  as 
the  file  shall  be  nearer  to  the  pivot,  and  the  right 
guide  will  gain  only  so  much  as  may  be  necessary  to 
maintain  between  his  own  and  the  preceding  division 
the  same  distance  wliich  separates  their  marching 
flanks.  • 


294.  Each  chief  of  division,  turning  to  it,  will  regu- 
late its  march,  and  see  that  it  remains  constantly  in- 
cluded between  its  guides,  that  its  alignment  con- 
tinues nearly  parallel  to  that  of  the  preceding  division, 
and  that  the  centre  bends  only  a  little  to  the  rear. 


295.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  movement, 
and  cause  the  pivot  of  the  leading  division  to  length- 
en or  to  shorten  the  step,  conforming  to  the  principle 
established,  school  of  the  company.  No.  227 — if  eitlier 
be  necessary  to  facilitate  the  movement  of  the  other 
divisions. 


296.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  near  the  left 
guide  of  the  leading  division,  will  regulate  his  march. 


sen  >   L  (IF  THE  BATTALIMN— PART  III.  (9 

and  take  care,  above  all,  that  he  does  not  throw  him- 
self icifAin  the  arc  he  ought  to  describe. 

297.  The  major,  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  guides, 
will  see  that  the  last  three  conform  themselves,  each 
by  slight  degrees,  to  the  movement  of  the  guide  im- 
mediately preceding,  and  that  neither  inclines  too 
much  in  the  endeavor  to  cover  too  promptly  the  guide 
in  his  front;  he  wiH  rectify  any  serious  fault  that  may 
be  committed  in  either  of  those  particulars. 

298.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  wheel  nearly  ended, 
will  command: 


1.  Forrcnrd.     2.  MARCH. 

299.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  leading  division  completes  its  wheel, 
it  will  ri'sunie  the  direct  march;  the  other  divisions 
will  conform  themselves  to  this  movemeat;  and  if 
any  guide  find  himself  not  covering  his  immediate 
leader,  he  will,  by  slight  degrees,  bring  himself  on  the 
trace  of  that  guide,  by  advancing  the  right  shoulder. 

300.  If  the  ccdumn,  right  in  front,  has  to  change 
dlrecti«ui  to  the  left,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  it  to 
take  the  guide  to  the  right,  and  then  command  : 

1.  Battalion,  left  ichccl.    2.   March. 

301.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will 
change  direction  to  the  left,  according  to  the  princi- 
ples just  prescribed,  and  by  inverse  means. 

302.  When   the   battalion   shall   have  resumed  the 


70  yCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  HI. 

direct  march,  the  colonel  wil!  change  the  guide  to  the 
left,  on  seeing  the  last  three  guides  nearly  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  one  in  front. 

30'A.  The  foregoing  changes  of  direction  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  sauie  principles  in  a  col- 
umn, left  in  front. 

304.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  will 
change  direction  in  marching,  by  the  commands  and 
means  indicated  for  a  column  by  division. 

305.  The  guide,  who  is  the  pivot  of  the  particular 
W'heel,  ought  to  maintain  himself  at  his  usual  distance 
of  six  paces  from  the  guide  wln»  precedes  him  ;  if  this 
distance  be  not  exactly  preserved,  the  divisions  would 
necessarily  become  confounded,  which  must  be  care- 
fully avoided. 


2d.  To  change  direction  from  a  halt. 


30C.  A  column  by  company,  or  by  division,  closed 
in  mass,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  give  it  a  new  direction,  and  in  which  it  is  to  re- 
main, he  will  cause  it  ti»  execute  this  movement  bj 
the  flanks  of  subdivisions,  in  the  following  manner: 

307.  The  battalion  having  the  right  in  front,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  ctuse  it  to  change  direction 
by  the  right  flank,  he  will  indicate  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  the  point  of  direction  to  the  right;  this  oflicer 
will  immediately  establish,  (»n  the  new  direction,  two 
markers,  distant  from  each  other  a  little  less  than  the 
front  of  the  first  subdivision,  the  first  marker  in  front 
of  the  right  file  of  this  subdivision  ;  which  being  exe- 
cuted, he  will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  III.  71 

1.  Change  direction  hy  the  risht  flank.  2.  Battalion, 
right— Face.  3.  March  [_or ,  double  quick — 
March.] 

303.  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  each  chief  of  snhdivision  will  place 
himself  hy  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

300.  At  the  comniand  march,  all  the  subdivisions 
will  sti^p  off  together:  the  right  guide  of  the  handing 
one  will  direct  himself  from  the  first  step,  parallelly 
to  the  markers  placed  in  advance  on  the  new  direc- 
tion ;  the  chief  of  tho  subdivision  will  not  follow  the 
movement,  but  see  it  file  past,  and  as  soon  as  the  left 
guide  shall  have  passed,  he  will  command : 

1.  First  company  \_or  flrst  division'\.     2.  HALT. 
3.  Front.     4.  Left— Dress. 

310.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  subdivision  will 
place  itself  against  the  two  markers,  and  be  prompt- 
ly aligned  by  its  chief. 

311.  The  right  guide  of  each  of  the  following  sub- 
divisions will  conform  hitiiself  to  the  direction  of  the 
right  guidf*  of  the  subdivisi(»n  preceding  his  own  in 
the  c(»lumn,  so  as  to  enter  on  the  new  direction  par- 
allelly to  that  subdivision,  and  at  the  distance  of  four 
paces  fr(un  its  rear  rank. 

312.  Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  halt  in  his  own 
person,  on  arriving  oppctsite  to  the  left  guides  already 
placed  on  the  new  direction,  see  his  subdivision  file 
past,  and  c(»nform  himself,  in  hajtiug  and  aligning  it, 
to  what  is  prescribed  No.  309. 


72  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATl^ALION— PART  III. 

313.  If  the  change  of  direction  be  by  the  left  flank, 
the  colonel  will  cause  markers  to  be  established  aa 
before,  the  first  in  front  of  tlie  left  file  of  the  lead- 
ing subdivision,  and  then  give  the  same  connuands, 
substituting  tlie  indication  left  for  right. 

314.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  subdivisions 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  each  chief  will  place  hinfi- 
self  by  the  side  of  his  left  guide. 

315.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  subdivisions 
will  step  off  together,  each  conducted  by  its  chief. 

316.  The  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  will  di- 
rect, himself,  from  the  first  step,  parallely  to  the 
markers ;  the  subdivision  will  be  conducted  by  its 
chief;  and  as  soon  as  its  left  guide  shall  have  passed 
the  second  marker,  it  will  be  halted  and  aligned  as 
prescribed  above;  and  so  of  each  of  the  following 
subdivisions. 

317.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  on  the  designa- 
ted flank,  to  see  that  each  subdivision  enters  the  new 
direction  parallelly  to  the  leading  one,  andatthepre- 
scrib'^l  distance  from  that  which  precedes. 

318.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  in 
front  of,  and  facing  to,  the  guide  of  the  leading  sub- 
division, and  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  follow- 
ing guides,  as  they  successively  arrive  on  tlie  new  di- 
rection. 

319.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  last  subdivision. 

320.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  executed 
with  facility  and  precision,  it  is  necessary  that  the 
leading  subdivision  should  entirely  unmask  the  col 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  HI.  73 

nmn;  for  oxample,  the  movemont  boing  iiindo  by  the 
right  flank,  it  is  necessary  before  halting  the  leading 
subdivision,  that  its  left  guide  shall,  atle.ist,  have  ar- 
rived at  the  place  previously  occupied  by  its  right 
guide,  in  order  that  each  folhtwitig  subdivision  which 
has  to  pass  over  a  space  at  least  equal  to  its  frcuit  to 
put  itself  in  the  lunv  directi(ui,  and  whose  left  ought 
to  pass  the  point  at  which  the  right  had  rested,  may, 
at  the  command  halt,  find  itself  in  its  whole  front, 
parallel  to  the  leading  subdivision. 

321.  By.this  method  there  is  no  direction  that  may 
not  be  given  to  a  column  in  mass. 


Article  Ninth. 

Being  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  ynass,  to 
take   distances. 

322.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  take  full  dis- 
tances hy  the  head  of  the  column  when  it  has  to  pro- 
long itself  on  the  line  of  battle.  If,  on  the  contrary, 
it  has  to  form  itself  in  line  of  battle  on  the  ground  it 
occupies,  it  will  take  distances  on  the  leading  or  on 
the  rearmost  subdivision,  according  as  the  one  or 
other  may  find  itself  at  the  point  where  the  right 
or  left  of  the  battalion  ought  to  rest  in  line  of  battle. 

1st.    To  take  distances  hy  the  head  of  the  column. 

323.  The  column  being  by  company  at  halfdistance 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it 


74  SCFIOOL  OF  TIIP:  BATTALION— PART  III. 

t(»  take  full  distances  by  the  head,  he  will  cuinmand  : 
By  the  head  of  column,  take  ic/tccling  distance. 

324.  At  this  comniand,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
company  will  put  it  in  march  ;  to  this  end,  he  will 
command: 

1.  First  company,  forward.      2.   Guide  left.     3. 
March  [or  double  quick — March.] 

325.  When  the  second  shall  have  nearly  its  wheel- 
ing distance,  its  captain  will  command: 

1.  Second  company,  forward.     2.   Guide  left.     3. 
March  [or  double  (pnck—^lARCU.'] 

32G.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pro- 
nounced at  the  instant  that  this  company  shall  have 
its  wheeling  distance,  it  will  step  otl  smartly,  taking 
the  step  from  the  preceding  company.  Each  of  the 
other  c«»mpanies  will  successively  execute  what  lias 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

327.  The  colonel  will  see  that  each  company  puts 
itself  in  march  at  the  instant  it  has  its  distance. 

328.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  hold  himself  at  the 
bead  of  the  column,  and  direct  the  march  of  the  lead- 
ing guide. 

32S).  The  major  will  hold  himself  abreast  with  the 
rearmost  guide. 

330.  If  the  column,  instead  of  being  at  a  halt,  be 


SCHOOL    OF  THK  BATTALION— PART  IIL  75 

in  march,  the  colonel  will  give  the  same   commands, 
and  add: 

March  (or  douMc  quick — March). 

331.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  at 
the  command  vnirch,  the  captain  of  the  leading  com- 
pany will  cause  double  quick  time  to  be  taken;  which 
will  also  be  done  by  the  other  captains  as  the  com- 
panies successively  attain  their  proper  wheeling  dis- 
tance. 

332.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  the  leading  company  will  continue  to  march  at 
the  same  gait.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies 
will  cause  quick  time  to  be  taken,  and  as  each  compa- 
ny gains  its  proper  distance,  its  captain  will  cause  it 
to  retake  the  double  quick  step. 

2d.    To  take  distances  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

333.  If  the  colonel  wish  to  take  distances  on  the 
rearmost  company,  he  will  establish  two  markers  on 
the  direction  he  shall  wish  to  give  to  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, the  first  opposite  to  the  rearmost  company,  the 
second  marker  towards  the  head  (»f  the  column,  at 
company  distance  from  the  first,  and  b(»th  facing  to 
the  rear;  at  the  same  time,  the  right  general  guide, 
on  an  intimation  from  the  lieutenant  col(»nel,  will 
m(»ve  raj)idly  a  little  beyond  the  point  to  which  the 
head  of  the  column  will  extend,  and  place  himself 
correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  m  <rkers. 
These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 


76  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IIL 

1.  On  the  eighth  company,  take  tcheeling  distance.  2. 
Column  forward.  3.  Guide  left.  4.  March  (or 
double  quick— Marcu). 

334.  At  the  third  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  (lutside  of  the  directing  flank  ; 
the  cajjtain  of  the  eighth  company  will  caution  it  to 
stand  fust. 

335.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  all  the 
captains,  except  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company, 
this  latter  company  will  stand  tiist;  its  chief  will 
align  it  by  the  left  on  the  first  marker,  who  is  oppo- 
site to  this  company,  and  place  himself  before  its 
centre,  after  commanding :  Front.  At  this  com- 
mand, the  marker  will  retire,  and  the  left  guide  will 
take  his  place. 

336.  All  the  other  companies  will  put  themselves 
in  march,  the  guide  of  the  leading  one  directing  him- 
self a  little  within  the  right  general  guide  ;  when  the 
seventh  c(mipany  has  arrived  opposite  the  second 
marker,  its  captain  will  halt,  and  align  it  on  this 
marker,  in  the  manner  prescribed  for  the  eighth  com- 
pany. 

337  When  the  captain  of  the  sixth  company  shall 
see  that  there  is,  between  his  company  and  the 
seventh,  the  necessary  space  for  wheeling  into  line, 
he  will  halt  his  company;  the  guide  facing  to  the 
rear  will  place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction, 
and  the  moment  he  shall  be  assured  in  his  pt)silion, 
the  captain  will  align  the  company  by  the  left,  and 
then  place  himself  two  paces  bef(»re  its  centre ;  the 
other  companies  will    successively    conform    them- 


1 

J L 

J 

^'    "           \- 

^- 

41:- 


3i! 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.  77 

selves  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  sixth 
company. 

338.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  and  see 
that  each  company  halts  at  the  prescribed  distance; 
he  will  promptly  remedy  any  fault  that  may  be  com- 
mitted, and  as  soon  as  all  the  companies  shall  be  align- 
ed, he  will  cause  the  guides,  who  are  faced  to  the  rear, 
to  face  about. 

330.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  successively  as- 
sure the  left  guides  on  the  direction,  placing  himself 
in  their  rear,  as  they  arrive.      ^ 

34U.  The  major  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  and  will  direct  the  march  of  the  leading 
guide. 

2d.   To  take  distances  on  the  Iicad  of  the  column. 

341.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  take  distances  on  the 
leading  company,  will  establish  tv>o  markers  in  the 
manner  just  prescribed,  one  abreast  with  this  com- 
pany, and  the  other  at  company  distance  in  rear  of  the 
first,  but  both  facing  to  the  front:  the  left  general 
guide,  on  an  intimation  from  the  lieutenant  colonel, 
will  move  rapidly  to  the  rear  and  place  himself  cor- 
rectly on  the  i)r<tlongation  of  the  two  markers,  a  lit- 
tle beyond  the  point  to  which  the  rear  of  the  column 
will  extend:  these  dispositions  being  made,  the  colo- 
nel will  command: 

1,  On  the  first  company,  take  ucheding  distance.  2. 
Battalion,  aJwut — FACE.  3.  Column,  forward.  4. 
Guide  right.  5  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 


78     SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III. 

342.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
except  the  one    designated,    will    face    about,    the 
guides  remaining  in  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  * 
rear. 

343.  At  the  fouith  command,  the    captains    will  j 
place  themselves  outside  of  their  guides. 

344.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  de- 
signated company  will  align  it,  as  prescribed,  No.  335, 
on  the  murker  placed  bv  its  side. 

345.  The  remaining  companies  will  put  themselves 
in  march,  the  guide  of  the  rearmost  one  will  direct 
himself  a  little  within  the  left  general  guide;  when 
the  second  company  shall  have  arrived  opposite  the 
second  marker,  its  captain  will  face  it  about,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  270,  and  align  it, 
as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  first  company. 

340.  The  instant  that  the  third  company  shall  have 
its  wheeling  distance,  its  captain  will  halt  it  facing  it 
about,  as  prescribed.  No.  270,  and  align  it  by  the  left; 
the  captains  of  the  remaining  c(»mpanies  will  each,  in 
succession,  conform  himself  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  captain  of  the  third. 

347.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  as  in- 
dicated No.  338  ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  major 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos. 
339  and  340. 

348.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  in  a  column  with  the 
left  in  front. 

349.  They  will  be  executed  in  like  manner  in  a 
column  closed  iu  mass  ;  but,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  the 


7« 

■1                H             V 

^' 

^/' 

H              ^' 

N 

H              N-' 

_H ■' 

H^t' 


l(^ 


•   I 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IIL  79 

colonel  to  open  out  the  column  to  half,  instead  of 
full  distance,  he  will  substitute  in  the  commands, 
th«^  indication  /ja//,  for  that  of  ichceling  distance. 

:>')(}.  In  a  column  by  division,  distances  will  be  taken 
according  to  the  same  principles. 


Article  Tenth. 

Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance. 

3.51.  In  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance,  the  coun- 
termarch will  be  executed  by  the  means  indicated, 
school  of  the  company ;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

1.  Countermarch.  2.  Battalion  right  (or  left — Face. 
3.  By  file  left  (or  right).  4.  March  for  double 
quick — March). 

To  countermarch  a  column  closed  in  mass. 

3.')2.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the  counter- 
march will  l)e  executed  by  the  commands  and  means 
subjoined. 

353.  The  c<»lumn  being  supposed  formed  by  a  divi- 
sion, right  in  front,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Countermarch.  2.  Battalion,  right  and  left — FACE. 
3.  By  file  left  and  right.  4.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 


80  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IIL 

354.  At  the  first  c(»miiian(l,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd 
numbered  divisions  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the 
right,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  others  to  face  to  the 
left. 

355.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  divisions  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  the  even  to  the  left ;  the  right 
and  left  guides  of  all  the  divisions  will  face  about; 
the  chiefs  of  odd  divisions  will  hasten  to  their  right 
and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  each  chief 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  leading  front  rank 
man  of  his  division;  the  chiefs  of  even  divisions  will 
hasten  to  their  left,  and  caus(^  two  files  to  break  to 
the  rear,  and  each  chief  place  himself  on  the  right  of 
his  leading  front  rank  man. 

356.  At  the  command  inarch,  all  the  divisions,  each 
conducted  by  its  chief,  will  step  oft'  smartly,  the 
guides  standing  fast ;  each  odd  division  will  wheel  by 
file  to  the  left  around  its  right  guide ;  each  even  divi- 
sion will  wheel  by  file  to  the  right  around  its  left 
guide,  each  division  so  directing  its  march  as  to  arrive 
behind  its  opposite  guide,  and  when  its  head  shall  be 
up  with  this  guide,  the  chief  will  halt  the  division, 
and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front. 

357.  Each  division,  on  facing  to  the  front,  will  be 
aligned  by  its  chief  by  the  right;  to  this  end,  the 
chiefs  of  the  even  divisions  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
right  of  their  respective  divisions. 

358.  The  divisions  being  aligned,  each  chief  will 
command,  Front;  at  this,  the  guides  will  shift  to 
their  proper  flanks. 

359.  In  a  column  with  the  left  in  front,  the  couu- 


1L.^..-I  . 

— H 

■f              Ji 

— h 

Q 

J~ > 

~~i} 

0 

h 

ill 1*'    ... 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  lU.  81 

tennarch  will  be  executed  by  tlie  same  coiniTiands 
and  means;  but  all  the  divisions  will  be  aligned  by 
the  left:  to  this  end,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  divisions 
will  hasten  to  the  left  of  their  respective  divisions  as 
soon  as  the  latter  shall  have  been  faced  to  the  front. 

300.  The  colonel,  placed  on  the  directing  flank, 
will  superintend  the  general  movement. 

361.  The  countermarch  being  ended,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  will  always  place  himself  abreast  with 
the  leading,  and  the  major  abreast  with  the  rearmost 
division. 

302.  In  a  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  the 
countermarch  will  be  executed  by  the  same  means 
and  commands,  ajjplying  to  companies  what  is  pre- 
scribed for  divisions. 

363.  The  countermarch  will  always  take  place 
from  a  halt,  whether  the  cobimn  be  closed  in  mass, 
or  at  full,  or  half  distance. 


Article  Eleventh. 

Being   in    column   by   company,    closed    in    mass,  to 
form  (titisions. 

364.  The  column  being  closed  in  mass,  right  in 
front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
form  divisions,  he  will  command: 

1.   Form    divisions.     'Z.  Left    companies,   Irft — FACE. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 
6 


82  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  HI. 

365  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  left 
companies  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the  left. 

366.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  comi)anie8 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  4heir  captains  will  pliice 
themselves  by  the  side  of  their  respective  left  guides. 

367.  The  vi<fht  companies,  and  their  captains,  will 
stand  fast;  hut  the  rij^ht  and  left  guides  of  each  of 
these  companies  will  place  themselves  respectively 
before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  conii);iny  both 
guides  facing  to  the  right,  and  each  resting  his  right 
arm  gently  against  the  breast  oi'  the  front  rank  mau 
of  the  fiie,  in  order  to  mark  the  direction. 

368.  At  the  command  mnrch,  the  left  companies 
only  will  put  themselves  in  march,  their  captains 
standing  fast;  as  each  shall  see  that  his  company, 
filing  pjist,  has  nearly  cleared  the  colunm,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Such  company.     2.  TTalt.     3.  Fkont.  '| 

369.  The  first  comniiind  will  be  given  when  the 
company  shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  march;  the 
second  at  the  instant  it  shall  have  cleared  its  right 
company,  and  the  third  innnediately  after  the  second. 

370.  The  comi)any  having  faced  to  the  front,  the 
files,  if  tlieie  be  intervals  between  them,  will 
promptly  inclini'  to  the  right;  the  captain  will  pl.ice 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  company  of  the  divi- 
sion, and  align  himself  correctly  on  the  front  rank  of 
that  company. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.  83 

371.  The  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  same 
time  before  tme  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company, 
face  to  the  right,  aud  cover  correctly  the  guides  of 
the  right  company;  the  moment  his  captain  sees  him 
established  on  the  direction,  he  will  command: 

Right — Dress. 

372.  At  this,  the  left  company  will  dress  forward 
on  the  alignment  of  the  right  company;  the  front 
rank  man,  who  may  find  himself  opi)osite  to  the  left 
guide,  will,  with<»ut  preceding  his  rank,  rest  lightly 
his  breast  against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide;  the 
captain  of  the  left  ctnnpany  will  direct  its  alignment 
on  this  man,  and  the  alignment  being  assured,  he  will 
command,  Front;  but  not  quit  his  position. 

373.  The  colonel  seeing  the  divisions  formed,  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

374.  At  this,  the  guides  who  have  marked  the 
fronts  (tf  divisions  will  return  to  their  places  in  col- 
umn, the  left  guide  of  each  right  couipany  passing 
through  the  interval  in  the  centre  of  the  division,  and 
the  captains  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed  No. 
75. 

37.'3.  The  colonel,  from  the  directing  flank  of  the 
column,  will  superinteud  the  general  execution  of  the 
movement. 

37C.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a 


84  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-PART  IIL 

halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divisions,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Form   divisions.      2.  Left   companies,   by   the    left 
flank.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

377.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the 
right  companies  will  command,  Mark  time,  the  cap- 
tains of  the  left  companies  will  caution  their  com- 
panies to  face  by  the  left  flank. 

378.  At  the  third  command,  the  right  companies 
will  mark  time,  tiie  left  conii)anies  will  face  to  the 
left;  the  captains  of  the  left  compnnies  will  each  see 
his  company  file  past  him,  and  when  it  has  cleared 
the  column,  w'ill  command: 

Such  company  by  the  right  flank — MARCH. 

As  soon  as  the  divisions  are  formed,  the  colouel 
will  command : 

4.  Foncard.     5.  March. 

379.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  colunm  will  resume 
the  gait  at  which  it  was  marching  previous  to  the 
commencement  of  the  movement.  The  guides  of 
each  division  will  remain  on  the  right  and  left  of  their 
respective  companies ;  the  left  guide  of  the  right 
company  will  pass  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  before 
the  two  companies  are  united;  the  right  guide  of  the 
left  company  will  step  into  the  rear  rank.  The  cap- 
tains will  place  themselves  as  prescribed  No.  75. 


TEHimmiMa 


v:. 


fcr-i 


^'■:r.t-jr 


;^-rtf^^       ^:=^ 


J, ■ — Y* 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.  85 

Being  in  column    at   full  or  half   distance    to  form 
divisions. 

380.  If  the  coliimu  be  at  a  halt,  and,  instead  of. 
being  clnsod  in  mass,  is  at  full  or  half  distance,  divi- 
sions will  be  formed  in  the  same  manner;  but  the 
captains  (if  the  h^ft  companies,  if  the  movement  be 
made  in  ([uick  time,  after  connnandii  g  Front,  will 
each  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company, 
and  c<»mmand,  1.  Such  company,  foricard.  2.  Guide 
right.  3.  March.  If  the  movement  be  made  in 
double  quick  time,  each  will  comma  d  as  soon  as  his 
company  has  cleared  the  column  : 

1.  Such  company  by  the  right  flank.     2.  March. 

3^1.  The  right  guide  of  each  left  company  will  so 
direct  his  march  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  (»f  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  right  company.  The  left  company 
being  nearly  up  with  the  rear  rank  of  the  right  com- 
pany, its  captain  will  halt  it,  and  the  movement  will 
be  Hnish  -d  as  prescribed  No.  371  and  following. 

382.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  movement  will  be 
ex«'cuted  by  inverse  means :  the  right  companies 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  presciibed  above 
f<»r  the  loft  ctmijianies  ;  and  the  two  guides,  placed 
res|)ectivc]y,  iM-fure  the  right  and  left  files  of  each  left 
company,  will  face  to  the  left.  At  the  command. 
Guides  posts,  g'wvn  hy  thi'  cohtnel,  the  guides,  who 
have  marked  the  front  of  divisions,  and  the  captains, 
will  quickly  retake  their  places  in  the  c<»lumn. 

3S:{.  Ifthe  cjtlunni  be  marching  at  full  distance, 
the  divisions  wi  1  be  formed  as  prescribed  No.  J 96. 
If  it  be  marching  at  half  distance,  the  formatiim  will 


86  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IIL 

take  place  by  the  comniauds  and  according  to  the 
principles  indicated  No.  'S76  ;  if  the  column  be  niarcli- 
ing  in  double  quick  time,  the  companies  which  should 
ynirk  time  will  march  in  quick  time  by  the  commands 
of  their  captains, 

Revjarhs  on  the  fornintion  of  divisions  from   a  halt. 

384,  As  this  movement  may  be  considered  as  the 
element  of  deployments,  it  ought  to  be  executed  with 
the  utmost  accuracy. 

385.  If  companies  marching  by  the  flank  do  not 
preserve  exactly  their  distances,  th  're  will  be  open- 
ings between  the  files  at  the  instant  of  facing  to  the 
front. 

I^Hfi.  If  captains  halt  their  companies  too  early, 
tliey  will  want  sp;ic<%  and  the  files  which  have  not 
clciired  the  thinks  of  the  standing  companies  will  not 
be  able  to  dress  into  line  without  pushing  their  ranks 
latrnilly. 

387,  If  on  the  contrary  the  companies  be  halted 
too  late,  it  will  be  necessary  for  them  to  incline  to 
the  right  or  left  in  Iressing ;  and  in  deploym -nts, 
either  of  these  faults  would  lead  to  error  in  the  fol- 
lowing comj)anies, 

388.  As  often  as  a  guide  shall  have  to  step  out  to 
place  himself  bef(»re  his  subdivision  in  order  to  mark 
th(^  direction,  he  will  be  particularly  careful  to  place 
himself  so  as  to  1)e  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  outer 
files  of  the  subdivision  when  they  shall  be  aligned  :  if 
he  take  too  much  distance,  and  neither  of  those  fil-es 
finds  itself  against  liiin,  the  chiefs  of  the  subdivision 
wmII  have  no  assured  point  on  which  to  direct  the 
alignment. 


SBIIOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-  PART  IV.  87 

PART  FOURTH. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in  column 
to  the  order  in  battle. 

Article  First. 

Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle. 

389.  The  line  of  battle  may  be  raarked  or  deter-' 
mined  in  three  different  manners:  1st,  hy  pLieing 
two  markers  eighty  or  a  hundred  paces  apart,  on  the 
direction  it  is  wisht-d  to  give  to  the  line  ;  2d,  by 
placing  a  marker  at  the  point  at  which  it  may  be  in- 
tended to  rest  a  flank,  and  then  choosing  a  second 
point  towards,  or  beyond  the  opposite  flank,  and 
there  posting  a  second  marker  distant  frcun  each 
other  a  little  les^  than  the  L'ading  subdivision  ;  3^/, 
by  choosing  at  first  the  points  of  direction  for  the 
flanks,  and  then  determining,  by  intermediate  points, 
the  straight  line  between  those  selected  points,  both 
of  which  may  sometimes  be  bejMtud  reach. 

Article  Second. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  colnmn  at  full  dis- 
tance into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)  ^ 

2    On  the  right  (or  left)  1  •   ,    ,.         r  i,  ^^i 

3.  Forward,  ^  >  mto  Ime  of  battle. 

4.  Faced  to  ihe  rear,      J 


88  SCHOOL  ON  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

1st.  Column    at  full  <lii<tancc,  right  in   front,  to  the 
Irft  into  line  of  battle. 

390.  A  column,  riglitin  front,  beiiifj  at  a  hnlt,  wheu 
the  colonel  shall  witsb  to  form  it  to  the  left  into  line, 
he  will  iis8iire»the  positions  of  the  guides  by  the 
means  previously  indicated,  and  then  command  ; 

J.  Lift  into  line,  ichccl.     2.  Maucii   (or  double  quick 
— Ma  [I c  II). 

391.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  of  the 
leading  company  will  hasten  to  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  left  guides  of  the  C(dumn,  face  to 
them,  and  place  himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one 
of  the  three  right  files  of  his  company,  when  they 
shall  be  in  line  :  he  will  be  assured  in  this  position 
by  the  lieiiteuant  c<;l(niel. 

392.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  capliiins,  the  left  front  rank  man  of  each  com- 
pai  y  will  face  to  the  left,  and  rest  his  breast  lightly 
against  llie  i-iglit  arm  of  his  guide:  the  companies 
will  wheel  t(»  the  left  on  the  princii)le  of  wheeling 
from  a  halt,  confoi'iniiig  thiMuselves  to  what  is  pi'o- 
scribed,  sclidol  <»f  tlu^  company.  No.  2:?9:  each  cap- 
tain will  tui'ii  to  his  company,  to  observe  the  execu- 
tion of  the;  movement,  and,  when  the  right  of  the 
company  shall  arrive  at  three  paces  from  the  line  of 
battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Such  company.     2.  Halt. 


FCIIOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  89 

303.  The  compnny  being  halted,  the  captnin  will 
pi  ice  hiuiself  on  the'line  by  the  side  of  the  left  front 
rank  man  of  the  company  next  on  the  right,  align 
himself  correctly,  and  command: 

3.  night— Brehs. 

394.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  dress  up 
between  the  captain  and  the  front  rank  man  (»n  its 
left,  the  captain  directieg  the  alignment  on  that  man  , 
the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  right  company, 
who  finds  himself  opposite  to  its  right  guide,  will 
lightly  rest  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  this 
guide. 

395.  Each  captain,  having  aligned  his  company, 
will  command,  FiiONT,  and  tbe  colonel  will  add : 

Guides— rosrs. 

396.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  return  to 
their  places  in  line  of  battle,  each  passing  through 
the  nearest  captain's  interval ;  to  permit  him  to  pass, 
the  captaiu  will  momentarily  step  before  the  first 
file  of  his  company,  and  the  covering  sergeant  behind 
the  sanje  file.  This  rule  is  general  for  all  the  Jor- 
matiuns  into  line  of  battle. 

397.  When  companies  fonn  line  of  ba'tle,  file 
closers  will  always  place  themselves  exactly  two 
paces  from  the  rear  rank,  which  will  sufficiently  as- 
sure their  alignment. 

398.  The  battalion  l)eing  correctly  aligned,  the 
colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  and  major,  as  well  as  the 
adjutant  and  sergeant  major,  will  return  to  their  re- 
spective places  in  line-of  battle.      This  rule  is  general 


90  SCH)  'L  OF  TEIE  BATTALI')N-PART  IV. 

for  all  the  formations  into  line  of  battle;  neverthe- 
less, the  battalion  being  in  the  school  of  the  elemen- 
tary instruction,  the  colonel  will  go  to  any  point  he 
may  deem  necessary. 

399.  A  column,  with  the  left  in  front,  will  form  it- 
self to  the  ri<r/it  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the 
same  principles;  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company 
will  place  himself,  at  the  first  command,  on  the  di- 
rection <tf  the  right  guides,  in  a  manner  correspond- 
ing to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  39J.  for  the  right  guide  of 
the  right  company. 

400.  At  the  command  guides  posts,  the  ca])tains 
will  take  their  places  in  line  of  battle  as  well  as  the 
guides.  This  rule  is  general  for  all  formations  into 
line  of  battle  in  ichich  the  companies  arc  aligned  by 
the  left. 

401.  A  column  by  division  may  form  itself  into  line 
of  battle  by  the  same  commands,  and  means,  but 
observing  whiit  follows  :  if  the  right  be  in  front,  at 
the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chiefs  of  division,  the 
left  guule  of  each  right  company  will  pliice  himself 
on  the  alignment  opposite  to  one  <»f  the  three  files  on 
the  left  of  his  company  ;  the  left  guide  <if  the  first 
cempiiny  will  be  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel;  the  left  guides  of  the  other  right 
companies  will  align  themselves  correctly  on  the  di- 
vision guides  ;  to  this  end,  the  division  guides  fou  the 
alignment)  will  invert,  and  hold  their  pieces  up  per- 
pendicularly before  the  centre  of  their  bodies,  at  the 
command  left  into  line,  tchcel.  If  the  c<dumn  by  di- 
vision lie  with  the  left  in  front,  the  right  guides  of 
left  companies  will  conform  themselves  to  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  left  guides  of  right  com- 


SCHOOL  OK  THE  BATTALI  N— PART  IV.     91 

panics,  and  place  themselves  on  the  line  opposite  to 
one  of  the  three  right  files  of  their  respective  com- 
panies. 

40*2.  A  column  in  march  will  be  foi-mod  into  line, 
without  halting,  by  the  same  commands  and  moans. 
At  the  command  march,  the  guides  will  halt  in  their 
places,  and  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  promptly  rec- 
tify their  positions. 

403.  If,  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  move  forward,  without  halting,  he  will 
command: 

1.   By  companies   left  irhcel.      2.  MARCH    (or  double 
quick— March). 

404.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  left  on 
a  fixed  j)ivot,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany, Xo.  201  ;  the  lelt  guides  will  step  back  into  the 
rank  of  file  closers  before  the  w^ieel  is  completed, 
and  when  the  right  of  the  companies  shall  arrive  near 
the  line,  the  colonel  will  command: 

3.  Foricard.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  centre. 

405.  At  the  fnnrth  c(»mmand,  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  <'«»ni]»lrted,  the  compiiiiies  will  march  di- 
rectly to  the  front.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  coh»r 
and  the  genoral  guides  will  movQ  rapidly  six  paces  to 
the  front.  The  c<donel  will  assure  the  direction  of 
the  color,  the  captains  of  comjianies  and  the  men 
will,  at  once,  conform  themselves  to  the  principles  of 
the  march  in  line  of  battle,  to  be  hereinafter  indi- 
cated, No.  587,  and  following. 


92     SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

406.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  col- 
uuju  left  iu  frout. 


By  inversion  to  the  light  (or  left)   into  line   of  battle. 

407.  When  a  column,  light  in  front,  shall  be  under 
the  necessity  of  forming  itself  into  line  faced  to  the 
reverse  flank,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  execute 
this  formation  by  the  shortest  movement,  he  will  com- 
mand : 


1.  By  inversion,  right  into  line,  zchcel.     2.   Battalion, 
guide  right. 

408.  At  the  first  connnand,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  place  himself  in  tront,  and  facing  to  the  right 
guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  ;  at  the  second  com- 
mand, he  will  rectify,  as  promptly  as  possible,  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides  of  the  colunm ;  the 
captain  of  the  odd  company,  if  there  be  one,  and  the 
column  be  by  division,  ;\  ill  promptly  bring  the  right 
of  his  company  on  the  direction,  and  at  company  dis- 
tance fr  m  the  division  next  in  front;  the  left  guide 
of  the  leading  sulxlivision  will  i)lace  himself  <»n  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides,  and  will  be  assured  iu 
his  positiim  by  the  lieutenant  colonel;  which  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quicfc—MARCU). 

409.  At  this,  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each  sub- 
division will  face  to  the  right,  rest  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  left  arm  of  his  guide,  and  the  battalion 


SCH«-OL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  93 

will  form  itself  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed ;  which  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command: 


Guides — Posts. 

410.  If  the  colmnn  be  with  the  left  in  front,  it  will 
form  itself,  by  inversion,  to  the  left  into  line,  accord- 
ing to  the  s:ime  principles. 

411.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion,  when 
formed  into  line  of  battle,  to  be  moved  forward,  the 
m(»v«'in('nt  will  be  executed  by  the  commands,  and 
according  to  the  principles  indicated  in  No.  4():i;  al- 
ways preceding  the  command,  by  companies  right  (or 
left)  wheel,  by  the  command,  by  inversion. 


Successive  Formations. 


412.  Under  the  denomination  of  successive  forma- 
tions are  included  all  those  formations  where  the 
several  subdivisitnis  of  a  column  arrive  one  after  an- 
other on  the  line  (»f  battle  ;  such  are  formations  on 
the  right,  or  left,  forward  and  faced  to  the  rear  into 
line  of  battle,  as  well  as  deployments  of  columns  in 
mass. 

413.  The  successive  formations  which  may  be  or- 
dered when  the  c(»lumn  is  marching,  and  is  to  con- 
tinue marching,  will  be  executed  by  a  coujbinatiou  (»f 
the  two  gaits,  quick  and  double  quick  time. 


94     SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

2d.  Column  at  full  distance,  on  the  right  (or  onJhe 
left),  into  line  of  battle. 

414.  A  column  by  company,  at  full  distance  and 
right  in  front,  having  to  form  itself  on  the  right  into 
line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  indicate  to  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel  a  little  in  advance,  the  point  of  appui,  or 
rest,  for  the  right,  as  well  as  the  point  of  direction  to 
the  left;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  hasten  with  two 
markers,  and  establish  them  in  the  following  manner 
on  the  diiection  indicated. 

415.  Tlie  first  marker  will  be  placed  at  the  pitint 
of  appui  for  the  right  front  rank  man  of  the  leading 
company ;  the  second  will  indicate  the  point  where 
one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  same  company,  will 
rest  when  in  line;  they  will  be  placed  so  as  to  pre- 
sent the  right  shoulder  to  the  battalion  when  formed. 

41G.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  cokuiel 
will  command  : 

1.   On  the  right,  into  line.     2.  Battalion,  guide  right. 

417.  At  the  second  command,  the  right  will  be- 
come the  directing  flank,  and  the  touch  of  the  elbow 
will  be  to  that  side ;  the  right  guide  of  the  leading 
company  will  march  straight  forward  until  up  with 
the  turning  point,  and  each  foHowing  guide  will 
march  in  the  trace  of  the  one  immediately  pre;  eding. 

418  The  leading  company  being  nearly  up  with 
the  first  marker,  its  ca})tain  will  connnaud;  1.  Right 
turn,  and  w^hen  the  company  is  precisely  up  with  this 
marker,  he  will  add  :  2.  March. 


/'■'^p. 


MWMimi^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  VL  95 

419.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
turn  to  the  ripht;  the  right  guide  will  so  dirt-ct  him- 
self as  to  bring  the  man  next  to  him  opposite  to  the 
right  marker,  and  when  at  three  paces  Irum  him,  the 
captain  will  command: 

1.  First  compnmj.     2.  HALT. 

420.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt;  the  files,  not  yet  in  line,  will  form  promptly; 
the  left  guide  will  retire  as  u  file  closer;  and  the  cap- 
tain will  then  command: 

3.  Righi — Dress. 

421.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  align  it- 
self; the  two  men  who  find  themselves  opposite  to  the 
two  markers,  will  each  liglitly  rest  his  breast  against 
the  right  arm  of  his  marker;  the  captain,  passing  to 
the  right  of  the  frcuit  rank,  will  direct  the  aligmnent 
on  thest;  tw<t  men.  These  rules  are  general  for  all 
successive  formations. 

422.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march 
straightforward;  wln-n  arrived  oj)posite  to  the  left 
flank  of  the  jjreccdinn  company,  it  will  turn  to  ^he 
right,  and  be  formed  on  th»'  line  of  battle,  as  has  just 
been  prescribi-d ;  the  right  guide  will  direct  himself 
8o  as  to  come  upon  that  liiu?  by  the  side  of  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  first  company. 

423.  At  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line 
of  battle,  the  company  will  be  halt«»d  by  its  captain, 
who  will  place  himseh  I'r.Aly  by  the  side  of  the  man 


i 


96     SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

on  the  left  of  the  precediiig  coiupjinj-,  and  align  Iiim 
self  correctly  on  its  front  rank. 

424.  The  left  fjuide  will,  at  the  same  time,  place    II 
himself  before  one  of  the  tliree  left  files  of  liis  com- 
pany,   and  facing  to  the  right,  he  will  })laee  himself 
accurately   on   the   divection   of  the  two  markers  of 
the  preceding  company. 


425.  The  captain  will  then  command: 

Right    Dress. 

42G  At  this  command,  the  second  company  will 
dress  forward  on  the  line;  the  captain  will  direct  its 
alignment  on  the  front  rank  man  who  has  rested  his 
breast  against  the  left  guide  of  the  company. 

427.  The  following  companies  will  thus  come  suc- 
cessively to  form  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle, 
each  conforming  itself  to  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  tluMMie  next  to  the  right;  and  when  they 
shall  all  be  established,  the  colonel  will  command: 

Guides— FOSTS. 

•  428.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  take  their 
places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  placed  be- 
fore the  right  company  will  retire. 

429.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  the  movement  to  be 
executed  in  double  quick  time,  he  will  add  the  com- 
mand :  Double  quick — Makcm.  At  the  command 
march,  all  the  companies  will  take  the  double  quick 


SCFIOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  97 

stop,  and  tlse  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescrib- 
ed, No.  417,  and  following. 

■\:]0.  The  coloufl  will  follow  up  the  formation,  pas- 
sing along  in  front,  and  being  alwa3s  oi)p(»siteto  the 
C(»mpany  about  to  turn :  it  is  thus  that  he  will  be  the 
better  able  to  see  and  to  correct  the  error  that  would 
r<'.sult  from  a  C(»uuuand  given  too  soon  or  too  late  to 
the  preceding  company. 

431.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will,  with  the  greatest 
care,  assure  the  direction  of  the  guides;  to  this  end, 
the  instant  that  the  markers  are  established  for  the 
lending  company,  he  will  move  a  little  beyond  the 
point  at  whicli  the  left  of  the  next  company  will 
rest,  establish  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  two  markers,  and  assure  the  guide  of  the  se- 
cond company  on  this  direction;  this  guide  being  as- 
sured, tlie  lieut«'nant  C(donel  will  place  himself  far- 
ther to  the  rear,  in  order  to  assure,  in  like  manner, 
the  guide  of  the  third  company,  and  so  on  succes- 
sively, to  the  left  of  the  battalion.  In  assuring  the 
guides  in  their  pssiticms  on  the  line  of  battle,  he  will 
take  care  to  let  tliom  first  place  thems<_*lves,  and  con- 
fine himself  to  rectifying  their  positions  if  they 
do  not  cover  accurately,  and  at  the  i)roper  distance, 
the  preceding  guide's  or  markers.  This  rule  is  gen- 
eral for  all  fsitccrssirc  formations. 


4:V2.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  on  the 
left  into  line  <if  battle  according  to  the  same  princi- 
plrs:  the  Ciiptains  will  gi.  to  the  left  of  their  respec- 
tive compMiiies  to  align  them,  and  shift  afterwards  to 
their  prop<T  flanks,  as  prescribed,  No.  4!.0. 
7 


98  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  on  the  right,  or  left,  into  line 
of  battle. 

433.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  executed 
with  refjularity,  it  is  necessary  to  establisii  the  line  of 
battle  so  that  the  guide  of  each  company,  after  turn- 
ing, may  have  at  least  ten  steps  to  take,  in  order  to 
come  upon  that  line. 

434.  In  the  first  exercises,  the  line  of  battle  will 
be  established  on  a  direction  parallel  to  that  of  the 
column  :  but  when  the  captains  and  guides  shall  com- 
prehend the  mechanism  of  the  movement,  the  colonel 
will  generally  choose  (»bli(ine  directions,  in  order  to 
habituate  the  battalion  to  form  itself  in  any  direc- 
tion. 

435.  When  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  forms 
a  sensible  angle  with  that  of  tiie  march  of  the  column, 
the  Cidonel,  before  beginning  the  movement,  will  give 
the  head  ol  the  column  a  new  direction  parallel  to 
that  line:  to  this  end,  he  will  indicate  to  the  guide  of 
the  leading  comj)any  a  point  in  advance,  on  which 
this  guide  will  inunediately  direct  himself,  and  the 
Comi)any  will  conform  itself  to  the  direction  of  its 
guide,  at  the  command,  or  on  a  mere  caution,  of  the 
captain,  according  as  tlie  change  ol  direction  nuiy  re- 
quire :  each  following  company  will  nuike  the  same 
movement,  on  the  same  ground,  as  it  shall  successive- 
ly arrive.  ]iy  this  means  the  guides  of  all  the  com- 
panies in  the  column  will  have,  after  turning,  nearly 
the  same  numlxir  of  paces  t<»  take  in  order  to  come 
upon  the  line  of  battle. 

436.  Every  captain  will  always  observe,  in  placing 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.     99 

himself  on  that  lino,  not  to  give  the  command  dress, 
until  alter  the  guide  of  his  compaey  shall  have  been 
assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 
This  rule  is  general  for  all  successive  formations. 

437.  Each  captain  will  cause  his  company  to  sup- 
port arms,  the  instant  that  the  captain,  who  follows 
him,  shall  have  commanded /rowf.  This  rule  is  gen- 
eral for  all  successive  formations. 

438.  When  in  the  execution  of  this  movement,  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  commence  firing,  he  will  give 
the  order  to  that  effect  to  the  captain  whose  compa- 
ny is  the  first  in  line  of  battle:  this  captain  will  im- 
mediately place  himself  behind  the  centre  of  his  com- 
pany, and  as  soon  as  the  next  captain  shall  have  com- 
manded front,  he  will  commence  the  fire  by  file,  by 
the  connnands  prescribed,  school  of  the  company. 
At  the  command/rc  by  file,  the  marker  at  the  outer 
file  of  this  first  company  will  retire,  and  the  other 
will  place  himself  against  the  nearest  man  of  the 
Hext  company.  The  captain  of  the  latter  will  com- 
mence firing  as  soon  as  the  captain  of  the  third  com- 
pany, in  line,  shall  have  conmianded//7>H<;  the  mark- 
er bef(»re  the  nearest  file  of  the  sec(»nd  company,  in 
line,  will  now  retire,  and  the  guide  before  the  oppo- 
site tlank  will  place  himself  before  the  nearest  file  of 
the  third  company,  in  line,  and  so  on,  in  continuation, 
to  the  last  company  on  the  left  or  rij,'ht  of  the  battal- 
ion, according  as  the  formation  may  have  c(tmnienced 
with  the  right  or  left  in  front. 

43).  In  all  the  successive  formations,  the  same 
principles  will  be  observed  for  the  execution  of  the 
fire  by  file.  This  fire  will  always  be  executed  by  the 
command  of  each  captain  of  company. 


100         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-PART  IV. 

3d.   Column  at  full  distance,  foncard  into  line  of  battle. 

440.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  wlien  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  form  it  forward  into  line,  he  will  conform 
to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415,  and  then 
command : 

1.  Foncard  into  line.     2.   By  company,  left  Italf  icheel. 

3.  March  (or  doiddc  quick— ^L\KCU). 

441.  At  the  first  comnuind,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  add — guide  right,  i)ut  the  company 
in  march,  halt  it  three  paces  fi-om  the  markers,  and 
align  it  against  the  latter  by  the  right. 

442.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  other  Compa- 
nies will  wheel  to  the  lef!t  on  fixed  pivots;  and,  at 
the  instant  the  colonel  shall  judge,  according  to  the 
direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  that  the  companies 
have  suflficientty  wheeled,  he  will  comnuind: 

4.  Foncard.     5.  Maucii.     G.  Guide  right. 

443.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  ceasing 
to  wheel,  will  march'  straight  forward;  and  at  the 
sixth,  the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right. 
The  right  guide  of  the  second  company,  who  is  near- 
est to  the  line  of  battle,  will  march  straight  forward; 
each  succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the  file  im- 
mediately before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel. 

444.  The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite 


.^-U^ 


^ 


J 


zy 


V'    ■'■\ 


/. 


^^ 


t- 


ifCIIOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.        101 

to  the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to 
turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach  the  line  of  bat- 
tle ;  and  wlien  its  right  guide  shall  be  at  three  paces 
from  that  line,  the  capiain  will  command: 


1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt. 


445.  At  the  second  commaud,  the  company  will 
halt;  the  files  not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  will 
cniiie  into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place  him- 
self on  the  line  of  battle,  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one 
of  the  three  files  on  the  left  of  the  company;  and  as 
soon  as  he  is  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel,  the  captain,  having  placed  himself  accu- 
rately on  the  line  of  battle,  will  command  : 

3.  Right— Dress. 


410.  At  the  instant  that  the  guide  of  the  second 
company  begins  to  turn  to  the  right,  the  guide  of  the 
third,  ceasing  to  follow  the  file  immediately  before 
him,  will  march  straight  forward  ;  and,  when  he  shall 
arrive  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  second,  his  captain 
will  cause  the  company  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order 
to  approach  the  line  of  battle,  halt  it  at  three  paces 
from  that  line,  and  align  it  by  the  right,  as  prescribed 
for  the  second  company. 

447.  Each  following  company  will  execute  what 
has  just  been  i)rescribed  (or  tlie  third,  as  the  preced- 
ing company  shall  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  ap- 
proach the  hue  of  battle. 


102       ycnooL  of  the  battalion— part  iv. 

448  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — POSTS. 

440.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  ob- 
serve in  this  formation,  what  is  prescribed  for  them 
on  the  ri<j;ht  into  line. 

450.  A  column  left  in  front,  w^ill  form  itself  for- 
ward into  lijie  of  battle  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples and  by  inverse  means. 

451.  When  a  column  by  company  at  full  distance, 
ripht  in  front,  and  in  march,  shall  arrive  behind  the 
right  of  the  line  on  whic^i  it  is  to  form  into  battle, 
the  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415. 

452.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  at 
company  distance  from  the  two  markers  established 
on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.   Fonrard  into  line.     2.  By  coinpany,  left  luilf  wheel. 
3.  March  (or  douhle  quick — Mar(;ii). 

45'.5.  At  the  first  connuand,  the  captain  of  the  first 
company  will  command.  Guide  right,  aiul  caution  it 
to  nuirch  directly  to  the  front,  the  captains  of  the 
other  companies  will  caution  them  to  wheel  to  the 
left. 

454.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  first  company  will  continue  to  march 
to  the  front,  takijig  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right. 
Its  chief  will  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the  mark- 
ers, and  align  it  by  the  right.  The  other  companies 
will  wheel  to  the  left  on  fixed  pivots,  and  at  the  in- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  103 

stant  tlio  cctloncl  sIimII  juflye  that  they  have  wheeled 
sufficiently,  he  will  Cduunand  : 


4.  Forward.     5.  Marcr.       6.   Guide  risrht. 


455.  At  the  fifth  eoimnaiid,  the  companies  will 
cease  to  wheel  and  nmvc  forward.  At  the  sixth, they 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right.  The 
movement  will  be  executed  as  previously  explained. 

4.")6.  If  the  Colonel  should  wish  to  form  the  column 
forward  into  line,  and  to  continue  to  march  in  this 
order,  he  will  not  cause  markers  to  be  established  ; 
the  movement  w  ill  be  executed  in  double  r^uick  time' 
by  the  same  commands  and  means,  but  with  the  fol- 
lowing modifications. 

457.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  tlie  first 
com])any  will  add  quich  time  after  the  command  ^wirfc 
right.  At  the  sec(Mid  command,  the  fiist  company 
will  Continue  to  march  in  quick  time,  and  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right;  its  chief  will  im- 
mediately ))lac<'  himself  on  its  right,  and  to  assure 
tli«,'  march  will  take  j)oints  of  direction  to  the  front. 
'Ihe  captain  of  the  second  company  will  cause  his 
company  to  take  the  same  gait  as  po(m  as  it  shall  ar- 
rive on  a  line  with  the  first,  and  will  als(»  move  to  the 
right  of  his  oompany  ;  the  captains  of  the  third  and 
fourth  companies  will  execute  successively  what  has 
just  been  preseribed  for  the  second.  The  companies 
will  jireserve  tlie  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right,  until 
tlie  command,  guide  centre. 

458.  Wlieu  the  color  comjiany  shall  have  entered 


104  SCHOOL  OF  TUV.  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

the  linf ,  tlie  colonel  will  coinmand  (riiide  centre.  At 
this  eouniiaiKl,  the  color-bearpr  ami  the  right  general 
guitle  \\[]\  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  advance  of  the 
line.  The  colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of  the 
color-bearer.  Tlie  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  right 
coni])anies  will  ininiediately  conform  tliemselves  to 
the  i)rinciples  of  the  march  in  line  of  battle.  The 
left  companies  and  the  left  general  guide,  as  they  ar- 
rive ou  the  line,  will  also  conform  to  tlie  same  prin- 
ciples. If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  when  the  last  comjjany  shall  have  arrived  on  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  double  quick  to  be 
resumed. 


.  459.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  movement  be  en- 
tirely completed,  before  halting  the  battalion.  As 
soon  as  the  part  of  the  battalion  already  formed  shall 
have  arrived  on  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will 
halt  tin*  battalion;  the  companies  not  in  line  will 
each  complete  the  movement. 


Re 


marks  on  t/ic  formation  foriranl ,  into  line  of  battle. 


400.  The  precision  of  this  movement  depends  on 
the  direction  tli(^  companies  have  at  the  moment  the 
cohuiel  commands  7V;r»7//v/— Makcii.  The  colonel 
will  judge  nicely  the  point  of  time  for  giving  this 
command,  observing  that,  if  the  direction  of  the  line 
of  battle  form  with  that  of  the  colunm  a  right,  or 
nearly  a  right  angle,  the  com])ai)ies  <»ught  to  wheel 
about  the  eighth  of  the  circle,  and  that  the  more  accu- 
rate the  angle  formed  by  the  two  directions,  so  much  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  IV.         105 

more  tbo  compnnies  ought  to  wheel  before   inarching 
straight  forward.  ^ 

401.  It  is  impitrtant  that  each  company  in  march- 
ing towards  the  line  of  battle  should  turn  exactly 
oi)posite  the  point  where  its  capt;iin  ought  to  place 
himself  on  that  line;  if  a  company  turn  too  soon,  it 
will  find  it  self  masked,  in  part,  by  that  which  pre- 
ceded it  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  be  obliged  to  uu- 
m.isk  itsi'lf  by  the  oblique  step;  if  it  turn  too  late, 
it  will  leave  an  interval  between  itself  and  the  pre- 
ceding company  to  be  regained  in  like  manner.  In 
either  cnse,  the  next  company  will  be  led  into  error, 
and  the  fault  propagated  to  the  opposite  flank  of  the 
battalion. 

402.  The  guide  of  each  company  ought  so  to  regu- 
late himself  in  turning,  as  tobring  his  company  to  the 
halting  point  parallelly  with  tl;e  line  of  battle. 

403.  If  the  angle  formed  by  the  liiie  of  battle  and 
the  primitive  directicm  of  the  column  be  so  acute,  that 
the  companies  on  arriving  o})posite  to  their  respec- 
tive plares  on  the  line  of  battle,  find  themselves  near- 
ly ])arallol  to  it,  the  (•a])t;iins  will  not  give  the  com- 
m;nid,  riiiht  (or  Irft)  turn,  lint  each  h.ilt  his  compa- 
ny, ])lac»'  himself  on  the  line,  and  c<unmand: 

Eight  (or  /f//)— Dress. 

404.  If,  <»n  the  contrary,  the  angle  f  jmi-^d  by  the 
line  of  battle  and  the  primitive  direction  of  the 
cohnnn  be  much  greater  than  a  right  angle,  the  for- 
mation should  b(;  executed,  not  by  the  movement /or- 
icard  into  line  of  battle,  but  by  that  of  o«  the  right  (or 


106         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART    IV. 

left)  into  line  of  battle,  and  accoidiug  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  this  fori^ation. 

465.  If  a  company  encounter  an  obstncle  sufficient 
to  prevent  it  from  marching  by  the  front,  it  will  right 
(or  left)  face  in  marching,  by  the  commnnds  and 
means  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company,  Nos. 
314  and  315.  The  guide  will  continue  to  folh.w  the 
same  file  behind  which  he  was  marching,  and  will 
maintain  exactly  the  same  distance  from  the  compa- 
ny immediately  preceding  his  own.  The  obstacle  be- 
ing passed,  the  company  will  be  formed  into  line  by 
the  command  of  its  captain. 


Ath.  Column  at  full  distance,  faced  to  the   rear,  into 
line  of  battle. 

466.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  coh)uel  shall 
wish  to  form  it  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  he  and  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is 
prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415,  and  the  colonel  will 
then  command: 

1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  right — 
Face.    3.  March  (or  douhle  quick — March). 

467.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  wall  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and  put 
it  in  march,  causing  it  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and 
direct  its  march  towards  the  line  of  battle  which  it 
will  pass  in  rear  of  the  left  marker;  the  first  file 
having  passed  three  paces  beyond  the  line,  the  com- 
pany will  wheel  again  by  file  to  the  left,  in  order  to 


/  /'  .'^ 

• 


•4i 


J  ~i 


^ 


■ TOWMifiJi!:!  !''fMiMitfiiiiiiifr:'.'miF;(r  ;'i;jr;Mif'affffW'BM''i!gf 

HUii IT 


'WIT 


106 

lefi)  i 
pies  ]: 

465 
to  pn 
(or  I 
meau 
314  a 
same 
maint 
ny  iiii 
ing  p; 
the  c< 


ith.  < 


46f 
right 
wish 
lieute 
presc 
then    • 

1.  In 
Fa 

4G: 

ingc 

it  in 

diroc 

will 

havii 

pany 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  107 

]'lice  itself  in  rear  of  the  two  markers;  being  in 
this  position,  its  captain  will  halt  it,  face  it  to  the 
i'v'-mt,  and  align  it  by  the  right  against  the  markers. 

468.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  other  compa- 
iiiis  will  face  to  the  right,  each  captain  placing  him- 
M  li'  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

4(59,  At  the  command  march,  the  companies  will 
put  themselves  in  movement;  the  left  guide  of  the 
second,  who  is  nearest  to  the  line  of  battle,  will  hasten 
in  advance  to  mark  that  line;  he  will  place  himself 
on  it  as  prescribed  above  for  successive  formntions, 
and  thus  indicate  to  his  captain  the  point  at  which  he 
ought  to  pass  the  line  of  battle,  by  three  paces,  in 
order  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and  then  to  direct 
his  company  parallelly  to  that  line. 

470,  As  soon  as  the  first  file  of  this  company  shall 
have  arrived  near  the  left  file  of  the  preceding  one 
already  on  the  line  of  battle,  its  captain  will  com- 
mand : 


1.  Second  company.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front,    4. 
Riorht— Dress. 


471.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
company  shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  take  to  reach 
the  halting  point. 

472.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt. 

473.  At  the  third,  the  company  will  face  to  the 
front,  and  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  the 
latter  will  promptly  close  to  the  right ;  the  captain 
will  immediately  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  man 


108         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

on  the  left  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align  him- 
self on  its  frout  rank. 

474.  The  fourth  command  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  426. 

475.  The  following  companies  will  be  conducted 
and  established  on  the  line  of  battle  as  just  prescrib- 
ed for  the  second,  each  regulating  itself  by  the  one 
that  precedes  it;  the  left  guides  will  detach  them- 
selves in  time  to  precede  their  respective  companies 
on  the  line  by  twelve  or  fifteen  paces,  and  each  place 
himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left 
files  of  his  company,  when  in  line.  If  the  movement 
be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  the  moment  it  is 
commenced,  all  the  left  guides  will  detach  themselves 
at  the  same  time  from  the  column,  and  will  move  at 
a  run,  to  establish  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle. 

476.  The  fornuition  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides —TosTS. 

477.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel,  in  this 
formation,  will  each  observe  what  is  prescribed  for 
him  in  that  of  on  the  right,  into  line  of  battle. 

478.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  faced 
to  the  rear  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

■  479.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  should  arrive 
in  front  of  the  right  of  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  form 
into  battle,  the  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  414  and  415. 

480.  When  the  head  of  the  column  shall  be  nearly 


SCHOOr-  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.        109 

at  oonipany  distance  from  the  two  markers  establish- 
ed on  the  line,  the  eoU>nel  will  command: 

].  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  hy  the 
right  fank.     3.  Marcu  (or  douhlc  quick — March). 

4'^!.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  cau- 
tion their  companies  to  face  by  the  right  flank. 

482.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains  of  companies,  all  the  companies  will  fiice 
to  llie  rijL'ht;  the  first  company  will  then  wheel  by  file 
to  the  left,  and  be  directed  by  its  captain  a  little  to 
the  rear  of  the  left  marker;  then  pass  three  paces 
beyond  the  line,  and  wheel  agam  by  file  to  the  left; 
havinc  arriv.-d  on  the  liue,  the  captain  will  halt  the 
cf»mpany,  and  align  it  by  the  right.  The  remaining 
part  of  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  heretofore 
explained. 

4H3.  The  foregoing  principles  are  applicable  to  a 
column,  left  in  frout. 

484.  As  the  companies  approach  the  line  of  battle, 
it  i/s  necessary  that  their  captains  should  so  direct  the 
march  as  t<>  cn»s8  that  line  a  little  in  rear  of  their  re- 
spective L'uides,  who  are  faced  to  the  basis  of  the 
formation;  lience  each  guide  ought  to  detach  himself 
in  time  to  find  himself  correctly  established  on  the 
directi<»n  before  his  company  shall  come  up  with 
bim. 


110  sen  )0L  UF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

Article  Third. 
Formation  in  line  of  battle  by  tico  movements. 

485.  If  a  column  by  company,  riolit  in  front,  and 
at  a  halt,  find  itself  in  part  on  the  line  of  battle,  and 
the  colonel  should  think  proper  to  foi  ni  line  of  bat- 
tle before  all  the  companies  enter  the  new  direction, 
the  fornnition  will  be  executed  in  the  foUowing  man- 
ner. 

486.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  colunm  has  ar 
rived  behind  the  line  of  battle,  and  that  five  compa- 
nies have  entered  the  new  direction.  The  coU)nel 
having  assured  the  guides  of  the  first  five  companies 
on  the   direction,  will  command  : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.      2.     Three  rear  companies, 
forward  into  line. 

487.  At  the  second  connnaiid,  the  chief  of  each  of 
the  rear  companies  wid  c(uninand  :  By  company,  left 
half  ichccl;  and  the  colonel  will  add: 

3.  March  ('or  double  quick — March). 

488.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first 
five  companies  will  form  themselves  to  the  left,  into 
line  of  battle,  and  the  three  last  forward,  into  litie  of 
battle,  by  the  means  presci-ibed  for  these  respective 
formations;  each  captain  of  the  three  rear  companies 
will,  when  his  company  shall  have  sufficiently  wheel- 
ed, command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.        Ill 


1.  Foncard.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

4S9.  If  the  column  be  iu  march,  the  c<ilonel  will 
comma. :d : 

1.   To  the  left,  and  foncard  into  line.     2.  March  (or 
double  quick — MARCH  J. 

490.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  those 
companies  which  have  not  entered  on  the  new  direc- 
tion, will  command:  By  company,  left  halfichccl.  At 
the  command  march,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  five 
companies  will  form  left  into  line,  and  the  last  three 
forward  into  line,  as  prescribed  for  these  respective 
formations.  Tli«)se  captains  who  foi  m  their  companies 
forward  iut<>  line  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed, 
No.  488. 

491.  If  the  colonel  should  wish,  in  forming  the  bat- 
talion into  line,  to  march  it  immediately  forward,  he 
will  command: 

1.  By  company  to  the  left,  and  forward  into  line. 
2.  March. 

492.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain,  whose 
company  is  not  yet  in  the  new  direction,  will  com- 
mand: ].  By  company,  left  half  icheel;  2.  Double  quick. 
At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  cap- 
tains, the  companies  not  in  the  new  direction  will 
execute  what  is  prescribed  above  f(u-formi  g  forward 

I  into  linr  while  marching;  each  of  the  other  companies 
j  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and  when  the 


]12  SCHOOL  OF  THE  H  ATT  A  LION -PART  IV. 

right  of  those  coinpanies  shall  iirrive  (Ui  the  line,  the 
colonel  will  coininand: 


3.  Foricard.     4.  March.     5.  Guide  centre. 

493.  The  fifth  comuiiind  will  be  given  when  the 
color-bearer  arrives  on  the  line,  if  not  already  there. 

494.  If  the  battalion  be  inarching  in  donble  quick 
time,  the  colonel  will  cause  quick  time  to  be  taken 
before  connnencing  the  niovemeut. 

495.  If,  instead  of  arriving  behind,  the  column 
should  arrive  before  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

I.  Left  into  line,  ir/tcel.     2.   Three  rear  companies  into 
line,  faced  to  the  rear. 

49C.  At  the  second  connnand,  the  cnptain  of  each 
of  the  three  rear  companies  w'll  connnand:  ].  Such 
company;  2.  Right — Fack.  The  coloiicl  will  then  add: 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

497.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first 
five  companies  \\\\\  form  themselves  to  the  left,  into 
line  of  battle,  and  the  three  la^i  faced  to  the  rear,  into 
line  of  battle,  by  the  means  prescribed  for  these  re- 
spective formations. 

498.  If  the  column  be  in  inarch,  the  colonel  will 
command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.    113 

1.   To  the  Ifft,  and  into  line  faced  to  the  rear. 
2.  March  for  double  quick — Marchj. 

499.  The  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
Nos.  391,  480,  and  following. 

500.  These  several  movements  in  a  column,  left  in 
fnmt,  will  be  exeeuted  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples, and  by  inverse  means. 

Article  Fourth. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  half  dis- 
tance, into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)  ^ 

2.  On  the  right  (or  left)  I-  ^    v        x- u  i.i.i 

3.  Forward,  bj%deployment,        ^°*«  ^"^«  ^^  ^^^t^^- 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear  J 

1st.  Column  at  half  distance,  to  the  left  ('or  right) 
into  line  of  battle. 

501.  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to  form  it- 
self to  the  left  (((r  right)  into  line  of  battle,  the  co- 
lonel will  cause  it  to  take  distances  by  one  of  the 
means  prescribed.  Article  IX.,  Part  third,  of  this 
school;  which  being  executed,  he  will  form  the  col- 
umn into  line  of  battle,  as  has  been  indicated,  No. 
390,  and  following. 

502.  If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  distance,  be 
in  march,  and  it  be  necessary  t<»  form  rapidly  into  line 
of  battle,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

8 


114        SCHOOL  (»F  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

1    By  the  rear  of  colinini  left  (ov right)  into  line,  trhccl. 
2.  March  Cor  r/owWc  quick — MarchJ. 


503.  At  the  first  command,  the  ri<;ht  iiciienil  guide 
will  move  riipidly  to  the  front,  and  jilace  liiniself  a 
little  beyond  the  ])oint  where  tlie  head  of  the  eolumu 
will  rest,  and  on  the  prolongation  of  the  guides.  The 
captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  command:  Left 
into  line,  irltecl ;  llie  other  captains  will  caution  their 
companies  to  continue  to  mar^-h  to  the  front. 


504.  At  the  command  ninrch,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company,  tiie  ruide  of  this 
company  will  halt  sliort,  and  the  company  will  wheel 
to  the  left,  contorming  to  the  prin^ples  prescribed 
for  wheeling  from  a  halt;  when  its  right  shall  arrive 
near  tlie  line,  the  captain  will  halt  the  company,  and 
align  it  by  the  left.  Tiu^  oilier  captains  will  place 
themselves  briskly  on  the  flank  of  the  ct)liimn;  when 
the  captain  of  the  seventh  sees  thei-e  is  sufticient  dis- 
taiKM'  bctwetMi  his  company  and  the  eighth  to  form 
the  latter  into  line,  he  will  command  :  Left  into  line, 
trhel — March  ;  the  left  guide  w  ill  lialt  short,  and 
facing  to  the  rear,  will  j)lace  himself  on  the  line;  the 
comiiaiiy  will  wheel  to  the  left,  the  man  on  the  left  of 
the  front  rank  \\\\\  f  ice  to  the  h'ft,  and  place  his  breast 
against  the  left  arm  of  the  guide;  the  captain  will 
halt  the  company  when  its  right  shall  arrive  near  the 
line,  and  will  align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  compa- 
nies will  conform  successively  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  seventh. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  115 

505.  Each  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  (»f  his 
company  on  the  left  man  in  the  front  rank  of  the  com- 
pany next  on  his  right. 

5UC.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  be  watchful  that 
the  leading  guide  marches  accurately  qu  the  pro- 
longation of  the  line  of  battle,  and  directs  himself  on 
the  right  general  guide.  The  major,  placed  iu  rear 
of  the  left  guide  of  the  eighth  company,  will,  as  soon 
as  the  guide  of  the  seventh  company  is  established  on 
the  direction,  hasten  in  rear  of  the  guides  of  the  other 
companies,  so  as  to  assure  each  of  them  in  succession 
on  the  line 

2d.   Column  at  half  distance,  on  the  right  (or  left)  into 
line  of  battle. 

507.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  form  itself  on 
the  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  battle,  as  prescribed 
for  a  column  at  flill  distance. 

Sd.  Column  at   half  distance,  foricard,  into  line  of 
battle. 

508.  If  it  be  wished  to  form  a  column  at  half  dis- 
tance, forward  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  first 
cause  it  to  close  in  mass  and  then  deploy  it  on  the 
leading  company. 

Ath.  Column  at  half  distance,  faced  to  the   rear,  into 
line  of  battle. 

509.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  be  formed  into 
line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  for  a 
column  at  full  distance. 


116  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

Article  Fifth. 
Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  inass. 

510.  A  column  in  mass  may  be  formed  into  line  of 
battle : 

1.  Faced  to  the  fi'ont,  by  the  deployment. 

2.  Faced  to  the  rear,  by  the  countermarch  and 

the  deployment. 

3.  Faced  to  the  right  and  faced  to  the  left,  by  a 

change  of  direction  by  the  flank,  and  the  de- 
ployment. 

511.  When  a  column  in  mass,  by  division,  arrives 
behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  intended  to  depk)y  it, 
the  colonel  will  indicate,  in  advance,  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel,  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  as  well  as 
the  point  on  which  he  may  wish  to  direct  the  column. 
The  lieutenant  colonel  will  immediately  detach  him- 
self with  two  markers,  and  establish  them  on  that 
line,  the  first  at  the  point  indicated,  the  second  a  little 
less  than  the  front  of  a  division  from  the  first. 

512.  Deployments  w^ill  always  be  made  upon  lines 
parallel,  and  lines  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle  : 
consequently,  if  the  head  of  the  column  be  near  the 
line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  commence  by  establish- 
ing the  direction  of  the  colunm  perpendicularly  to 
that  line,  if  it  be  not  already  so,  by  one  of  the  means 
indicated.  No.  244  and  following,  or  No.  307  and  fol- 
lowing.    If  the  column  be  in  march,  he  will  so  direct 


ill 


[ 


u  u  w 


SCHOOL 


OF  THE  BATT 


it  that  it  may  arrive  exactly  h 
peiitlicularly  to  the  line  of  bat 
paces  from  that  line. 

513.  The  column,  right  in  f 
supposed  that  the  colonel  wis! 
first  division ;  he  will  order  tl 
go  to  a  point  on  the  line  of  bat 
at  which  the  left  of  the  battal 
ployed,,  and  place  himself  cor 
tiou  of  the  markers  establishe 
mn. 

514  These  dispositions  bi 
will  command : 

1.  On  the  first  ditision,  (hploy 
left— Fac 

515.  At  the  first  command 
rrY'^'-'''-'^'""  it  to  stand 

'^«f'outmnU.      ""P^»J-.^-bo 

^p4,  first  div?'^'f»»''^thr. 
hue  ..fit...,'"^  "'Vision,  and  tij^, 


r*"  battle  «  f"' ""d  thei 


J^ 


J I 


u 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALF 'N— PART  IV.  117 

it  that  it  may  arrive  exactly  behind  the  markers,  per- 
pendieidarly  to  the  line  of  battle,  and  halt  it  at  three 
paces  from  that  line. 

513.  The  column,  right  in  front,  being  halted,  it  is 
supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to  deploy  it  on  the 
first  division  ;  he  will  order  the  left  general  guide  to 
go  to  a  point  on  the  line  of  battle  a  little  beyond  that 
at  which  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  de- 
l^loyed.  and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolonga 
tion  of  the  markers  established  before  the.  first  divi- 
sion. 

514  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 


1.   On  the  Jii'st  division,  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion, 
left— Face. 

515.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs  of  the 
three  other  divisions  will  remind  them  that  they  will 
have  to  face  to  the  left. 

516.  At  the  second  command,  the  three  last  divi- 
sions will  face  to  the  left;  the  chief  of  each  division 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  left  guide,  and 
the  junior  captain  by  the  side  of  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company,  who  will  have  stepped  into 
the  front  rank. 

517.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  place  a  third  marker  on  the  alignment  of  the  two 
first,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  tiles  of  the  right 
company,  first  division,  and  then  place  himself  on  the 
line  of  battle  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at  which 
the  left  of  the  second  division  will  rest. 


118  SCIIO   L  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

518.  The  colonel  will  then  coinmaud  : 

3.  March  {or  double  quick — Makciij. 

519.  At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  divi- 
sion will  go  to  its  right,  and  command  : 

Eitrht— Dress. 


520.  At  this,  the  division  will  dress  up  against  the 
markers  ;  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  its  junior  cap- 
tain, will  each  align  the  company  on  its  left,  and  then 
command : 

Front. 

521.  The  three  divisions,  faced  to  the  left,  will  put 
themselves  in  march  ;  tlie  ]eft  guide  of  tlie  second 
A^ill  direct  himself  parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle  ;  the 
left  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  march 
abreast  with  the  guide  of  the  second  ;  the  guides  of 
the  third  and  fourth,  each  })reserving  the  prescribed 
distance  between  hill  self  and  the  guide  of  the  divi- 
sion which  preceded  his  own  in  the  column. 

522.  The  chief  of  the  second  division  will  not  f<il- 
low  its  nujvement;  he  will  see  it  file  by  him,  and 
when  its  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him,  he 
will  comnumd : 

1-  Seco7id  division.    2.  Halt.    2.  Front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV  119 

523.  The  first  comniaiiil  will  be  given  when  the 
division  shall  yet  hive  seven  oreight  pnees  t(»  mareh ; 
the  second,  when  the  right  guide  shall  be  abreast 
with  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  the  third  immedi- 
ately after  the  second 

524  At  the  second  connnand,  the  division  will  halt ; 
at  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front,  and  if  there  be 
openings  between  the  files,  the  chief  of  the  division 
will  cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the  right ; 
the  left  guides  of  both  companies  will  step  upon  the 
line  of  battle,  face  to  the  right,  and  place  themselves 
on  the  direction  of  the  markers  established  before 
the  first  division,  each  guide  opposite  to  one  of  the 
three  left  files  of  his  company. 

525.  The  divisiim  having  faced  to  the  front,  its. 
chief  will  place  himself  accurately  on  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, ou  the  left  of  the  first  division  ;  and  when  he  shall 
see  the  guides  assured  on  the  direction,  he  will  com- 
mand, 7^/^/t^ — Diu^ss.  At  this,  the  division  will  be 
aligned  by  the  right  in  the  manner  indicated  for  the 
first. 

526.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  willccmtinue  to 
inarch;  at  the  connnand  halt;  given  to  the  second, 
the  chief  of  the  third  will  halt  in  hi.s  own  pers(m, 
place  himself  exactly  o]jposite  to  the  guide  of  the 
second,  after  this  division  shall  have  faced  to  the  front 
and  closed  its  files  ;  he  will  see  his  division  file  past, 
and  when  his  nght  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him, 
he  will  c<mimand  : 

1.  Third  diviiiion.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

527.  As  soon  as  the  division  faces  to  the  front,  its 


UO         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

chief  will  i)l;ic'e  himself  two  paces   before  its   centre, 
and  comniaiid  : 

1.    Third  division,  forward.     2.   Guide   right.     3. 
Maucii. 

528.  At  the  third  coniniaiid,tbe  division  will  march 
towards  the  line  of  battle  ;  the  ri«,dit  gnide  will  so  di- 
rect himself  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  man  on 
the  left  of  the  second  division,  and  when  the  division 
is  at  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  its  chief  will 
halt  it  and  align  it  by  the  right. 

529.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  conform 
himself  (and  the  chief  of  the  fifth,  if  there  be  a  fifth) 
to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  third. 

5:50.  The  d(;ployment  end<?d,  the  colonel  will  com- 
ma nd : 

Guides — Posts. 

531.  At  this  ccnnmand,  the  guides  will  resume 
their  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  will 
retire. 

532.  If  the  c  lunni  be  in  inarch,  aiul  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  first  division  without 
halting  the  colunui,  he  will  make  the  dispositi<ms  in- 
dicated Nos.  512  and  513,  and  when  the  first  division 
shall  have  ari'ived  at  three  paces  from  the  line,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  On  the  first  dicision,  dt ploy  column.  2.  Battalion 
by  the  left  flank.  3.  INIarcii  for  double  quick — 
March). 


SBHOOL  OF  TPIE  BATTALION- PART  IV.        121 

533.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  halt,  and  will  command, 
First  division  ;  the  other  chiefs  will  caution  their  di- 
visions to  face  by  the  left  flank. 

534.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  the  rear  divisions,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  command,  PIalt,  and  will  align  his  divi- 
sion by  the  right  against  the  markers  ;  the  other  di- 
visions will  face  to  the  left,  their  chiefs  hastening  to 
the  left  of  their  divisions.  The  second  division  will 
conform  its  movements  to  what  is  prescribed  Nos. 
522  and  following.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  526  and  follow- 
ing; but  the  chief  of  each  division  will  halt  in  his 
own  person  at  the  command  march  given  by  the 
chief  of  the  division  which  precedes  him,  and  when 
the  right  of  his  division  arrives  abreast  of  him,  he 
will  command  : 

Such  division,  by  the  right  flank — March. 

535.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  position 
of  the  guides,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  No. 
431.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  fourth  division. 

536.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  the  column 
without  halting  it,  and  to  continue  the  march,  the 
markers  will  not  be  posted ;  the  movement  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  comuiands  and  the  same  means 
as  the  foregoing,  but  with  the  following  modifica- 
tions : 

537  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  command,  1.  Guide  right.  2.  Quick 
time.     At  the  command,  Double  quick — March,  given 


122        .SCHOOL  ON  THE  BATTALION— PAliT  IV. 

by  the  coloiu'l,  t!ie  first  division  will  m;irch  iu  quick 
time  and  will  t.iko  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right ; 
the  captiiins  will  i)lace  themselves  on  tlie  right  of 
their  respective  companies;  the  captain  on  the  right 
of  the  battalion  will  take  points  on  the  ground  to  as- 
sure the  direction  of  the  march.  The  chief  of  the 
second  division  will  allow  his  division  to  tile  past 
him,  and  when  he  sees  its  right  -ibreast  of  him,  he 
will  command,  1.  Second  dirision  by  the  right  flunk. 
2.  Mauch.  '^.  Guide  right,  and  when  this  division  shall 
arrive  on  the  alignment  of  the  first,  he  will  cause 
it  to  march  in  quick  time.  The  third  and  fourth-di- 
visions will  deploy  according  to  the  same  principles 
at  the  second. 

538.  The  c<donel,  lieutenant  colonel,  major,  ar.d  co- 
lor-bearer will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  458. 


539.  The  c«donel  will  see,  pending  the  movement, 
that  the  princii)lcsjust  prescribed  are  duly  observed, 
and  particul.irly  that  the  divisions,  in  deploying,  be 
not  halted  t(to  soon  nor  toi)  hite.  He  \^■ill  C(»rrect 
promptly  and  <piickly  the  iaults  that  may  be  commit- 
ted, and  prevent  their  jtropagation.  This  rule  is 
general  for  all  dcploijnieuts. 

540.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if,  instead  of  de- 
ploying it  on  llie  first,  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  de- 
ploy it  on  the  rearmost  division,  he  will  cause  the  dis- 
positions to  be  made  indicated  No.  5J1  and  foUowiiig; 
but  it  will  be  the  right  general  guide  whom  he  will 
send  to  phice  himself  beyond  the  p<tint  at  which  the 
right  of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  deployed. 

541.  The  colonel  will  then  command: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  RATTALI"  N— PART  IV.    123 


1.   On  the  fourth    ('or  sucL)  division,  deploy   column. 
2.  Battalion,  right— Face. 

542.  At  the  first  coinuiand,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiets  of  the 
other  divisions  will  caution  them  that  they  will  have  to 
face  to  the  right. 

543.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  three  divi- 
sions will  face  to  the  right ;  and  the  chief  of  each 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  right  guide. 

544.  At  the  same  command,  thf^  lieutenant  colonel 
will  place  a  third  marker  between  the  first  two,  so 
that  this  marker  may  be  opposite  to  one  of  the 
three  right  files  of  the  left  company  of  the  division; 
the  lieutenant  colonel  will  then  place  himself  on  the 
line  of  battle  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at  which 
the  right  of  the  third  division  will  rest  when  de- 
ployed. 

545.  The  colonel  will  then  command : 

3.  March  (or  douLlc  quick — March j. 

546.  At  this  command,  the  three  right  divisions  will 
put  themselves  in  march,  the  guided  of  the  first  so  di 
recting  himself  as  to  pass  thi-ee  paces  within  the  line 
marked  by  the  right  general  guide.  The  chief  of  the 
third  division  will  not  folhnv  its  movement ;  he  will 
see  it  file  past,  halt  it  when  its  l&ft  guide  shall  be 
abreast  with  him,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front ; 
and,  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  he  will 
cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the  left. 


124  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

547.  Tho  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he  sees 
it  nearly  unmasked  by  the  three  others,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Fourth  division,  forward .     2.  Guide  left. 
3.  March. 

548.  At  the  ctmimand  march,  which  will  be  given 
the  instant  the  fourth  is  unmasked,  this  division  will 
approach  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at  three  paces 
from  the  markers  on  that  line,  its  chief  will  halt  it, 
and  command: 

Left— Dress. 

549.  At  this  command,  the  division  will  dress  for- 
ward against  the  markers ;  the  chief  of  the  division 
and  the  junior  captain  will  each  align  the  company 
on  his  right,  and  then  command  ; 

Front. 

550.  The  instant  that  the  third  division  is  unmask- 
ed, its  chief  will  cause  it  to  approoch  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  halt  it  in  the  manner  just  prescribed  for 
the  fourth. 

551.  The  moment  the  division  halts,  its  right  guide 
and  the  covering  sergeant  of  its  left  company  will 
step  on  the  line  of  battle,  placing  themselves  on 
the  prolongati<m  "  of  the  markers  established  in 
frontof  the  fourth  division  ;  as  soon  as  they  shall  be 
assured  in  their  positions,  the  division  will  be  aligned 
as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  fourth. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.        125 

552.  The  second  and  first  divisions  which  will  have 
continned  to  march,  will,  in  succession,  be  halted  and 
aligned  by  the  left,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  third; 
the  chiefs  of  these  divisions  will  conform  themselves 
to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  5'2(3.  The  second  being 
near  the  line  of  battle,  the  command  will  not  b(;  giv- 
en for  it  to  move  on  this  line  but  it  will  be  dressed 
up  to  it. 

553.  The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

Guides— FosTS. 

554.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  division  and 
the  guides  will  resume  their  places  in  line  of  battle, 
and  the  markers  will  retire. 

555.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  posi- 
tions of  the  guides  by  the  means  indicated.  No.  431, 
and  the  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with 
the  fourth  division. 

556.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  fourth  division,  he  will 
make  the  dispositions  indicated.  No.  511  and  follow- 
ing; and  when  the  head  of  the  column  shall  arrive 
within  three  paces  of  the  line,  he  will  command : 

1.  On  the  fourth  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battal- 
ion, by  the  right  flank.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

557.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  caution  it  to  halt,  and  will  command. 
Fourth  division;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions 
will  caution  their  divisions  to  face  to  the  right. 


12G        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-PART  IV. 

558.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repented  by 
the  chiefs  of  the  first  three  divisions,  the.  eliief  of  the 
fourth  will  command :  Halt.  Tlie  first  three  divi- 
sions will  face  to  the  right,  and  be  directed  parallelly 
to  the  line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  eacli  of  these 
divisions  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  right 
guide.  The  chief  of  the  tliird  division  will  see  liis 
division  file  past  him,  and  when  his  left  guide  is 
abreast  of  him,  he  will  halt  it,  and  face  it  to  the 
front.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  wlien  he 
shall  see  it  nearly  unmasked,  will  command:  1. 
Fourth  division  foricard ;  2.  Guide  left;  3.  MARfll 
(or  double  quick — March).  Tliis  division  will  nu)ve 
towards  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at  three  paces 
from  this  line,  it  will  be  halted  by  its  chief,  and  align- 
ed by  the  left. 

559.  The  chief  of  the  third  division  will  move  his 
division  forward,  cojitorming  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  fourth. 

560.  The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  first  divisions, 
after  halting  their  divisions,  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed.  No.  552. 

561  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  deploy  on  the 
fourth  division,  without  halting  the  column,  and  to 
continue  to  march  forward,  he  will  not  have  markers 
posted,  and  tlie  movement  will  be  executed  by  the 
same  conuuandsaud  the  same  means,  with  the  follow- 
ing modificiitions:  the  iiuirth  division,  when  un- 
masked, will  be  moved  forward  in  quick  tinu',  and 
will  Ctuitinue  to  nuirch,  instead  of  being  halted,  and 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The  third 
division,  on  being  unmasked,  will  be  moved  to  the 
fyu:t  in  double  quick  time,  but  when  it  arrives  on  the 


SCH   OL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.  127 

'alignment  of  the  fourth  it  will  take  the  quick  step, 
and  dress  to  the  left  until  theconinuind  Guide  centre, 
lis  given  by  the  colonel.  The  chiefs  of  the  second  and 
Hrst  divisions  will  conform  to  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  third.  When  the  first  divisiim  shall 
arrive  on  the  line,  the  colonel  may  cause  the  battal- 
ion to  take  the  double  quick  step. 

5G2.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  con- 
form to  what  has  been'piescribed,  Nos.  458  and 
459. 

563.  To  deploy  the  column  on  an  interior  division, 
the  colonel  will  cause  the  line  to  be  traced  by  the 
means  above  indicated,  and  the  general  guides  will 
move  briskly  on  the  line,  as  prescribed,  Nos.  513  and 
54i>.  This  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 


1.  On  such  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion 
outicards— Face.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

564.  Whether  the  column  be  with  the  right  or  left 
in  front,  the  divisions  which,  in  the  (trder  in  battle, 
belong  to  the  right  of  the  directing  one,  will  face  to 
the  right ;  the  others,  except  the  directing  division, 
will  face  to  the  left ;  the  divisions  in  front  of  the  lat- 
ter will  deploy  by  the  means  indicated.  No.  542,  and 
following:  those  in  its  rear  will  deploy  as  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  513,  and  following. 

565.  The  directing  division,  the  instant  it  finds  it- 
self mimasked,  will  approach  the  line  of  battle,  taking 


123         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 

the  guide  left  or  right,  according  as  the  riglit  or  left 
of  the  coluniii  may  be  in  front.  The  chit'f  of  tliis  di- 
vision will  align  it  by  tht^  directing  flank,  and  then 
step  back  into  the  rear,  in  order  uionientarily  to  give 
place  to  the  chief  of  the  next  for  aligning  the  next 
division. 

566.  The  lientenant  colonel  will  assnre  the  posi- 
tions of  the  gnides  of  divisions,  which  in  the  line  of 
battle,  take  the  right  of  the  directing  division,  and 
the  major  will  assure  the  p(>sitions  of  the  other  guides. 

567.  If  the  column  be  iu  march,  the  colonel  will 
command: 


1.  On  such  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion, 
by  the  right  and  left  flanks.  3.  MARCH  Cor  dou 
hie  quick — MARCH.) 

568.  The  divisions  which  are  in  front  of  the  di- 
recting one  will  deploy  by  the  means  indicated,  Nos. 
557,  and  following;  those  in  rear,  as  prescribed,  No. 
533,  and  following. 

569.  The  directing  division,  when  unmasked,  will  j 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  fourth  division, 
No.  558. 

570.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  ctdonel  and  major  will 
conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed,  Nos.  458  and 
459. 

571.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  deployments  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  in- 
verse means. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.         129 

Remarks  on   the    deployment    of  columns,    closed    in 
mass. 

572.  All  the  divisions  ought  to  deploy  rectangularly, 
to  march  otF  abreast,  and  to  preserve  their  distances 
towards  the  line  of  battle. 

57:1  Each  division,  the  instant  that  it  is  unmasked, 
ought  to  be  marched  towards  the  line  of  battle,  and 
to  be  aligned  upon  it  by  the  flank  next  to  the  direct- 
ing division  ;  the  latter,  whether  the  right  or  left  be 
in  front,  will  always  be  aligned  by  the  fliink  next  to 
the  point'of  appiti,  when  the  deph»ynient  is  made  on 
the  first  or  last  division ;  but  if  the  column  be  de- 
ployed on  an  interior  division,  this  division  will  be 
aligned  by  the  flank  which  teas  tliat  of  direction. 

574.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  see  that,  in  deploy- 
ing, the  principles  prescribed  for  marching  by  the 
flank  are  well  observed,  and  if  openings  between  the 
files  occur,  which  ought  not  to  happen  except  on 
broken  or  diflicult  grounds,  the  openings  ought  to  be 
promptly  closed  towards  the  directing  flaiik  as  soon 
as  the  divisions  face  to  the  frcmt. 

575.  If  a  chief  of  division  give  the  cammand  halt, 
or  the  command,  hy  the  right  or  left  flank,  too  soon 
or  too  late,  his  division  will  be  obliged  to  oblique  tc 
the  right  or  left  in  approaching  the  liise  of  battle, and 
his  fault  may  lead  the  following  subdivision  iato 
error. 

576.  In  the  divisions  which  deploy  by  the  left  flank, 
it  is  always  the  left  guide  of  each  company  who  ought 
to  place  himself  on  the  line   of  battle,  to   mark  the 

9 


]30         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  IV. 

direction;  in    divisions   wiiicli    deploy  b}'   the    right 
flank,  it  is  the  right  guide. 

577.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  may 
be  formed  to  the  lelt  or  to  the  right  into  line,  in  the 
same  manner  as  a  column  at  half  distance,  and  by 
the  means  indicated,  No.  5U2,  and  following. 

578.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  may 
be  formed  on  the  right  or  on  the  left  into  line  of 
battle,  as  a  column  at  half  distance  ;  but  in  order  to 
execute  this  movement,  without  arresting  the  march 
of  the  column,  it  is  necessary  that  the  guides  avoid, 
with  the  greatest  care,  shortening  the  step  in  turning, 
and  that  the  men  near  them,  resijectivcly,  conform 
themselves  rapidly  to  the  movements  of  their  guides. 

Remarks  on  inversions. 

579.  Inversions  giving  frequently  the  means  of 
forming  line  of  battle,  in  the  promptest  manner,  are 
of  great  utility  in  the  movements  of  au  army. 

580.  Tlie  ai)plication  that  may  be  made  of  inver- 
sions in  ftie  formations  to  the  right  and  to  the  left  in 
line  of  battle,  has  been  indicated.  No.  407,  and  fol- 
lowing. Tliey  may  also  be  advantageously  employed 
in  the  successive  formations,  except  in  that  of  faced 
to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle. 

581.  Formations,  by  inversion,  will  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  pi-inciples  as  formations  in  the 
direct  order:  but  the  colonel's  first  connnand  w'ill  al- 
ways begin  by  inversion. 

582.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle  by  inver- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV.         131 

sion,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish,  by  forming  it  into 
column,  to  bring  it  back  to  the  direct  order,  he  will 
cause  it  either  to  break  or  to  ploy  by  company,  or  by 
division,  accordingly  as  the  column  may  have  been 
by  company  or  by  division  before  it  had  been  formed 
into  line  of  battle  by  inversion. 

583.  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  formed  by 
inversion,  has  to  be  ployed  into  column,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  according  ^  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  if  the  line  were  in  the  direct  order,  but  ob- 
serving what  follows. 

584.  If  it  be  intended  that  the  column  shall  be  by 
division,  with  the  first  in  front,  or  by  company,  with 
the  first  company  in  front,  the  colonel  will  announce 
in  the  second  command — left  in  front,  because  the 
battalion  being  in  line  of  battle  by  inversion,  that  sub- 
division is  on  the  left. 

585.  Each  chief  whose  subdivision  takes  position  in 
the  column  in  front  of  the  directing  one,  will  conduct 
his  subdivision  till  it  halts;  and  each  chief  whose  sub- 
division takes  position  in  rear  of  the  directing  one, 
will  halt  in  his  own  person  when  up  with  the  pre- 
ceding right  guide,  and  see  his  subdivision  file  past ; 
and  each  chief  will  align  his  subdivision  by  the  right. 
When  the  column  is  to  be  put  in  march,  the  second 
command  will  be — guide  left,  because  the  proper 
right  is  in  front. 

586.  For  the  same  reason,  if  it  be  intended  that 
the  last  subdivision  shall  be  in  front,  right  in  front, 
will  be  announced  in  the  second  comnjuiidj  he  sub- 
divisions will  be  aligned  by  the  left,   and  to  put  the 


132         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-rART  V. 

column  in  mareli,  tbo  Krcdnd  command  ^vill  1  o,  gui(l< 
right,  because  the  proper  left  is  iu  front. 


PART  FIFTH. 

Article  First. 

To  adcance  in  line  of  battle. 

587.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  and 
supposed  to  be  the  directing  one,  when  tlie  colonel 
shall  wish  to  march  in  line  of  battle,  be  will  give  the 
lieutenant  colonel  an  intimation  of  his  purpose,  place 
himself  about  forty  paces  in  rear  of  the  color-iile,  and 
face  to  the  front. 

588.  The  lieutenant  coh)nel  will  place  himself  a  like 
distance  in  front  of  the  same  file,  and  face  to  the 
colonel,  who  will  establish  him  as  correctly  as  jxks- 
sible,  by  signal  of  the  sword,  peri)endicularly  to  the 
line  of  battle  opposite  to  the  color-bearer.  The  co- 
lonel will  next,  above  the  heads  of  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  color-bearer,  take  a  point  of  direction  in 
the  field  beyond,  if  a  distinct  one  present  itself,  ex- 
actly iu  the  prolongation  of  those  first  two  points.^ 

589.  The  colonel  will  then  move*  twenty  paces  fiir- 
ther  to  the  rear,  and  establish  two  markers  on  the 
prolongation  of  tlie  straight  line  jjassing  through  the 
color-bearer  and  the  lieutenantcolonel ;  these  mai-kera 
will  face  to  the  rear,  the  first  placed  about  twenty- 
five  paces  behind  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion,  and 
the  second  at  the  same  distance  from  the  first. 


1^ 


^  H 


-H H       .J- 


132         SCI 

column  in 
right,  becj 


587.  Th 
supposed  1 
shall  wish 
lieutenant 
himself  ab 
face  to  th« 

588.  Th 
distance  ii 
colonel,  w 
sible,  by  s 
line  of  bat 
lonel  will 
colonel  an 
the  field  b 
actly  in  tl 

589.  Tl 
therto  tl 
prolongati 
color-bear 
will  face 
five  paces 
the  secon< 


I 


-KzrTK 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  133 

590.  The  color-bearer  will  be  instructed  to  take, 
the  moment  the  lieutenant  colonel  shall  be  establish- 
ed on  the  perpendicular,  two  points  on  the  ground  in 
the  straight  Hue  which,  drawn  from  himself,  would 
pass  between  the  heels  of  that  officer;  the  first  of 
these  points  will  be  taken  at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces 
from  the  color-bearer. 

591.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  Battalion,  for icard. 

592.  At  this,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard  will 
advance  six  paces  to  the  fiont;  the  corporals  in  the 
rear  rank  will  place  themselves  in  the  front  rank,  and 
these  will  be  replaced  by  those  in  the  rank  of  file  clos- 
ers ;  at  the  same  time  the  two  general  guides  will 
move  in  advance,  abreast  with  the  color-bearer,  the 
one  on  the  right,  opposite  to  the  captain  of  the  right 
company,  the  other  opposite  to  the  sergeant  who 
closes  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

593.  The  captains  of  the  left  wing  will  shift,  pass- 
ing before  the  front  rank,  to  the  left  of  their  respec- 
tive companies ;  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battal- 
ion will  step  back  into  the  rear  rank.  The  covering 
sergeant  of  the  company  next  on  the  left  of  the  color- 
company,  will  step  into  the  front  rank. 

594.  The  lieutenant  colonel  having  assured  the  col- 
or-bearer on  the  line  between  himself  and  the  corpo- 
ral of  the  color-file,  now  in  the  front  rank,  will  go  to 
the  position  which  will  be  hereinafter  indicated.  No. 
602. 


134  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

595.  The  major  will  i)lace  himsolf  six  or  eight  paces 
on  either  flank  of  the  color-rank. 


596.  The  colonel  will  then  command: 

2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


597.  At  this  command,  the  battalion  will  step  off 
with  life;  the  color-bearer,  charged  with  the  step  and 
direction,  will  scrnpnlonsly  observe  the  length  and 
cadence  of  the  pace,  marching  on  the  prolongation  of 
the  two  points  previously  taken,  and  successively  tak- 
ing others  in  advance  by  the  means  indicated  in  the 
school  of  the  company;  the  corporal  on  his  right,  and 
the  one  on  his  left,  will  march  in  the  same  step,  tak- 
ing care  not  to  turn  the  head  or  shoulders,  the  color- 
bearer  supporting  the  color-Ianee  against  the  hip. 

598.  The  two  general  guides  will  march  in  the 
same  step  with  the  color-rank,  each  maintaining  him- 
self abreast,  or  nearly  so,  with  that  rank,  and  neither 
occupying  himself  with  the  movement  of  the  other. 

599.  The  three  corporals  of  the  color-guard,  now 
in  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion,  will  march  well 
aligiK'd,  elbow  to  clliow,  heads  direct  to  tlie  fi'ont, 
and  without  deranging  the  line  of  their  shoulders; 
the  centre  one  will  Ibllow  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the 
color-bearer,  and  maintain  the  same  step,  without 
lengthening  or  shortening  it,  except  on  an  intimation 
from  the  cohmel  or  lieutenant  colonel,  although  he 
should  find  himself  more  or  less  than  six  paces  from 
the  color-rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  TEIE  BATTALION— PART  V.  135 

600.  The  covering  sergeant  in  the  front  rank  be- 
tween the  color-comi)any  and  the  next  on  the  left, 
will  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  on  the  same  line,  with 
the  three  corporals  in  the  centre,  his  head  well  to  the 
front. 


601.  The  captains  of  the  color-company,  and  the 
company  next  to  the  left,  will  constitute,  with  the 
three  corporals  in  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  the 
basis  of  alignment  lor  both  wings  of  the  battalion; 
they  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  color-bear- 
er, and  exert  themselves  to  maintain  their  shoulders 
exactly  in  the  square  with  the  direction.  To  this  end, 
they  will  keep  their  heads  direct  to  the  front,  only 
occasionally  casting  an  eye  on  the  three  centre  cor- 
porals, with  the  slightest  possible  turn  of  the  neck, 
and  if  they  perceive  themselves  in  advance,  or  in  rear 
of  these  corporals,  the  captain,  or  two  captains,  will 
almost  insensibly  shorten  or  lengthen  the  step,  so  as, 

i  at  the  end  of  several  paces,  to  regain  the  true  align- 
ment, without  giving  sudden  checks  or  impulsions  to 
the  wings  beyond  them  respectively. 

602.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  twelve  or  fif- 
teen paces  on  the  right  of  the  captain  of  the  color- 
company,  will  maintain  this  captain  and  the  next  one 
beyond,  abreast  with  the  three  centre  corporals;  to 
this  end,  he  will  caution  either  to  lengthen  or  to  short- 
en the  step  as  may  be  necessary,  which  the  captain,  or 
two  captains,  will  execute  as  has  just  been  explained. 

G03.  All  the  other  captains  will  maintain  them- 
selves on  the  prolongation  of  this  basis;  and,  to  this 
end,  they  will  cast  their  eyes  towards  the  centre,  tak- 


136         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTAI, ION— PART  V. 

ing  care  to  turn  the  neck  but  sliirhtly,  and  not  to  de- 
range the  direction  of  their  shoulder. 

604.  The  captains  will  observe  the  march  of  their 
companies,  and  prevent  the  men  from  getting  in  ad- 
vance of  the  line  of  captains;  they  will  not  lengthen 
or  shorten  step  except  when  evidently  necessary;  be- 
cause, to  correct,  with  too  scrupulous  attention,  small 
faults,  is  apt  to  cause  the  production  of  greater — loss 
of  calmness,  silence,  and  equality  of  step,  each  of 
which  it  is  so  important  to  maintain. 

605.  The  men  will  constantly  keep  their  heads  well 
directed  to  the  front,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  towards 
the  centre,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the  flank, 
give  the  greatest  attention  to  the  squareness  of  should- 
ers, and  hold  themselves  always  very  slightly  behind 
the  line  of  the  captains,  in  order  never  to  shut  out 
from  the  view  of  the  latter  the  basis  of  alignment; 
they  will,  from  tinu^  to  time,  cast  an  eye  on  the  col- 
or-rank, or  on  the  general  guide  of  the  wing,  in  order 
to  march  constantly  in  the  same  step  with  those  ad- 
vanced persons. 

608.  Pending  the  march,  the  line  determined  by 
the  two  markers  (h  and  d)  will  be  prcdonged  by  plac- 
ing, in  prop(u-tion  as  the  battalion  advances,  a  third 
marker  (i  j  in  the  rear  of  the  first  {h),  then  the  unirk- 
er  (d)  will  quit  his  place  and  go  a  like  distance  in 
rear  of  (i);  the  marker  (Ji)  will,  in  his  turn,  do  the 
like  in  respect  to  (d),  and  so  on,  in  succession,  as 
long  as  the  l);ittalion  continues  to  iidvance;  each 
marker,  on  shifting  ])osition,  taking  care  to  face  to 
the  rear,  and  to  cover  accurately  the  twonnirkers  al- 
ready established  on  the  direction.  A  statF  officer, 
or  tiie  quartermaster  sergeant,  designated  for   the- 


137 

ly  fifteen 

from  the 

to  shift 

.'hind  the 


5elf  about 
battalion, 
of  mark- 
battalion, 
.  617  and 
or-bearer 
mniand : 


isten  thir- 
ank,  halt, 
■  direction 
he  sword; 
will  then 

I  from  the 
iite  shoul- 

II  conform 


nself  upon 

line  to  the 
r  the  cor- 
then   take 


1^ 


H^  H  '   •  H     C 


I  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  137 

i  purpose,  and  who  will  hold  himself  constantly  fifteen 

I  vv  twenty  paces  facing  the  marker  farthest  from  the 

t  liittalion,  will  cantion  each  marker   when   to  shift 

f  iilice,  and  assure  him  on  the  direction  behind  the 

I  other  two. 

GOT.  The  colonel  will  habitually  bold  himself  about 

tliirty  paces  in   rear  of  the  centre  of  his  battalion, 

1  I  lung  care  not  to  put  himself  on  the  line  of  mark- 

I  v<.  if,  for  example,  by  the  slanting  of  the  battalion, 

the  indications  which  will  be  given,  Nos.  617  and 

i lowing,  he  find  that  the  march  of  the  color-bearer 

,   is  not  perpendicular,  he  will  promptly  command: 


Point  of  direction  to  the  right  Cor  left). 


G08.  At  this  command,  the  major  will  hasten  thir- 
ty or  forty  paces  in  advance  of  the  color-rank,  halt, 
face  to  the  colonel,  and  place  himself  on  the  direction 
wliich  the  latter  will  indicate  by  signal  of  the  sword; 
the  corporal  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion  will  then 
direct  himself  upon  the  major,  on  a  caution  from  the 
c.ilonel,  advancing,  to  that  end,  the  opposite  shoul- 
der ;  the  corporals  on  his  right  and  left  will  conform 
themselves  to  his  direction. 


609.  The  color-bearer  will  also  direct  himself  upon 
the  major,  advancing  the  opposite  ?honlder,  the  nia- 
jor  causing  him,  at  the  same  time,  to  incline  to  the 
right  or  left,  until  he  shall  exactly  cover  the  cor- 
poral of  his  file;  the  color  bearer  will  then  take 
points  on  the  ground  in  this  new  direction. 


138    SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

610.  The  two  general  guides  will  conform  them- 
elves  to  the  new  direction  of  the  color-rank. 

Cll.  The  officer  charged  with  observing  the  suc- 
cessive replacing  of  the  markers  in  the  rear  of  the 
centre,  will  establish  them  promptly  on  the  new  di- 
rection, taking  for  basis  the  color-bearer  and  the 
corporal  of  his  file  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion  ; 
the  C(donel  will  verify  the  new  direction  of  the 
markers. 

612  The  lieutenant  colonel,  from  the  position  giv- 
en, No.  Cl)2,  will  see  that  the  two  centre  companies, 
and  successively  all  the  others,  conform  themselves  to 
the  new  direction  of  the  centre,  but  without  precip- 
itancy or  disorder;  he  will  then  endeavor  t<»  maintain 
that  basis  of  alignment  for  the  battalion,  perpendic- 
ularly to  the   direction  pursued  by  the  color-bearer. 

613.  He  will  often  observe  the  march  of  the  two 
wings;  and,  if  he  discover  that  the  captains  neglect 
to  conform  themselves  to  the  basis  of  alignment,  he 
will  recall  their  attention  by  the  comnunul — caj)- 
tain  of  (such)  cumpamj,  or  captains  of  (such)  com- 
pa7iies,  on  the  line — witliout,  however,  endeavoring 
too   scrupulously  to  correct  small  faults. 

614.  The  major  on  the  flank  of  the  c<dor-rank  will, 
during  the  march,  place  himself,  from  time  to  time, 
twenty  paces  in  front  of  that  rank,  face  to  the  rear, 
and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  i)rolongation  of 
the  markers  established  behind  the  centre,  in  order 
to  verify  the  exact  nuuch  of  the  color-bearer  on  that 
line ;  he  will  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  direction  of  the 
color-bearer,  who   will  immediately  take  two  new 


I 

^il'lillWIiBlig 


H  Sa  H  H 


I     r 


I 


H  t^         H        — r 


ti         m         n        ^- 


i 


I 


H  H    -ZZX 


1 


line  ;  he  will  rectify,  if  necessary,  tlio  direction  of  the 
color-bearor,  who   will  immediately   take  two  new 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION- PART  V.  139 

(I  pciDts  on  the  ground  behveeu  himself  and  the  ma- 

i  jm-. 

*  615.  All  the  principles  applicable  to  the  advance 
ill  line,  are  the  same  for  a  suhordinate  as  for  the  di- 
»  ?7r?/«^  battalion;  but  when  the  battalion  under  in- 
t  srruction  is  supposed  to  be  subordinate,  no  markers 
i  ^^  ill  be  placed  behind  its  centre. 

Remarks  on  the  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

(116.  If,  in  the  exercises  of  detail,  or  courses  of  ele- 
uit'iitary  instruction,  the  officers,  sergeants, corporals, 
ami  men,  have  not  been  well  confirmed  in  the  princi- 
I'l's  of  the  position  underarms,  as  well  as  in  the  length 
;tii(l  cadence  of  the  step,  the  march  of  the  battalion  in 
line  will  be  floating,  unsteady,  and  disunited. 

i!17.  If  the  color-bearer,  instead  of  marching  per- 
j(v  udicularly  forward,  pursue  an  oblique  direction, 
the  battalion  will  slant;  crowdings  in  one  wing,  and 
openings  in  the  other,  will  follow,  and  these  defects 
in  the  march,  becoming  more  and  more  embarrassing 
in  proportion  to  the  deviation  from  the  perpendicular, 
will  commence  near  the  centre. 

618.  It  is  then  of  the  greatest  importance  that  the 
color-bearer  should  direct  himselt  perpendicularly 
forward,  and  that  the  basis  of  alignment  should  al- 
ways be  perpendicular  to  the  line  pursued  by  him. 

619.  If  openings  be  formed,  if  the  files  crowd 
each  other,  if,  in  short,  disorder  ensue,  the  remedy 
ought  to  be    applied  as  promptly   as  possible,  but 


140  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

calmly,  with  few  words,  and  as  little  noise  as  practi- 
cable. 

G20.  The  object  of  the  general  guides,  in  the  march 
in  line  of  battle  is,  to  indicate  to  the  companies  near 
tlie  flanks  the  step  of  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  and 
to  afford  more  fiicility  in  establishing  the  wings  on  the 
direction  of  the  centre  if  they  should  be  too  much  in 
the  rear;  hence  the  necessity  that  these  guides  should 
maintain  the  same  step,  and  march  abreast,  or  very' 
nearly  so,  with  the  color-rank,  which  it  will  be  easy 
for  them  to  do  by  casting  from  time  to  time  an  eye 
on  that  rank. 

621 .  If  the  battalion  happen  to  lose  the  step,  the 
colonel  will  recall  its  attention  by  the  connnand,  to 
the — Stkp  ;  captains  and  their  companies  will  im- 
mediately cast  an  eye  on  the  color-rank,  or  one  of 
the  general  guides,  and  promptly  conform  themselves 
to  the  step. 

G22.  Finally,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to  the 
attainment  t>f  regularity  in  the  march  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, to  habituate  the  battalion  to  execute  with  as  much 
order  as  promptness  the  movements  prescribed  No. 
C07  and  following,  for  rectifying  the  direction  ;  it  is 
not  less  essential  that  commanders  of  battalions 
should  exercise  themselves,  with  the  greatest  care, 
in  forming  their  own  coup  dhril,  in  order  to  be  able 
to  judge  with  precision  the  direction  to  be  given  to 
their  battalions. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  141 

Article  Second. 

Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

623  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  oblique,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Right  for  left)  oblique.      2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March  ). 

624.  At  the  first  command,  the  major  w:ill  place 
himself  in  front  of,  and  fticed  to  the  color-bearer. 

625.  At  the  command  march,  the  whole  battalion 
will  take  the  oblique  step.  The  companies  and  cap- 
tains will  strictly  observe  the  principles  established 
in  the  school  of  the  company. 

626.  The  major  in  frt»nt  of  the  color-bearer  ought 
to  maintain  the  latter  in  a  line  with  the  centre  cor- 
poral, so  that  the  color-beaier  may  oblique  neither 
more  nor  less  than  that  corporal.  He  will  carefully 
observe  also  that  they  follow  parallel  directions  and 
preserve  the  same  length  of  step. 

627.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  take  care  that  the 
captains  and  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre  keep  ex- 
actly on  a  line  and  follow  parallel  directions. 

628.  The  colonel  will  see  that  the  battalion  pre- 
serves its  parallelism  ;  he  will  exert  himself  to  pre- 
vent the  files  trom  opening  or  crowding.  If  he  per- 
ceive the  latter  fault,  he  will  cause  the  files  on  the 
flank,  to  which  the  battalion  obliques,  to  open  out. 


142         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

629.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  direct  march  to  be  re- 
sumed, will  command : 

1.  Forward.    2.   March. 

630.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  re- 
sume the  direct  march.  The  mnjor  will  pla«;e  himself 
thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  color-bearer,  and  face  to 
the  colonel,  who  will  establish  him,  by  a  signal  of 
the  sword,  on  the  direction  which  the  color-bearer 
ought  to  pursue.  The  latter  will  immediately  take 
two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the 
major. 

631.  In  resuming  the  direct  march,  care  will  be 
taken  that  the  men  do  not  close  the  intervals  which 
may  exist  between  the  files  at  once ;  it  should  be  done 
almost  insensibly. 

Remarks  on  the  oblique  march. 

632.  The  object  of  the  oblique  stop  is  to  gain  ground 
to  the  right  or  U.'ft,  preserving  all  the  wliile  the  prim- 
itive direction  of  the  line  of  battle  ;  as  thus,  for  ex- 
ample :  the  battalion,  departing  from  the  line  {sz), 
arrives  on  the  line  {xx)  parallel  to  {sz). 

633.  It  is  then  essential  that  the  corporals  in  the 
centre  of  the  battalion,  and  the  captains  of  compa- 
nies, should  follow  parallel  directions,  and  maintain 
themselves  at  the  same  height ;  without  which  they 
will  give  a  false  direction  to  the  battalion. 

634.  The  C(donel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  exert 
themselves  to  prevent  the  files  from  crowding;  for, 
without  such  precaution,  the  oblique  nuirch  cannot  be 
executed  with  facility. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  143 


Article  Third. 

To  hah  the    battalion,    marching    in    line  of   battle, 
and  to  align  it. 

635.  The  battalion,  marching  in  the  line  of  battle, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  com- 
mand ; 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

636.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
halt ;  the  color-rank  and  the  general  guides  will  re- 
main in  front;  but  if  the  colonel  should  not  wish  im- 
mediately to  resume  the  advanci^  in  line,  nor  to  give 
a  general  alignment,  he  will  command  : 

Color  and  general  guides — PoSTS. 

637.  At  this  command,  the  color-ranb-  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  the 
captains  in  the  left  wing  will  shift  to  the  right  of  their 
companies. 

638.  If  the  colonel  should  then  judge  it  necessary 
to  rectify  the  alignment,  he  will  command  : 

Captains,  rectify  the  alignment. 

639.  The  captains  will  immediately  cast  an  eye 
towards  the  centre,  align  themselves  accurately,  on 
the  basis  of  the  alignment,  which  the  lieutenant  col- 
onel will  see  well  directed,  and  then  promptly  dress 
their  respective  companies.      The   lieutenant  c-olonel 


141  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIO^'-^Alr^  V. 

will  adnuiiiisli  such  ciiptains  as  may  not  be  at'ciirate- 
\y  on  the  alignment  by  the  command:  Captain  of 
Csucbj  company,  or  captains  of  (such)  companies, 
move  2ip  or  fall  hack. 

640.  But  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  givj?  the 
battalion  a  general  alignment,  either  parallel  (»r  ob- 
lique, instead  of  rectifying  it  as  above,  he  will  nxive 
some  paces  outside  (»f  one  of  the  general  guides  (tlie 
right  will  here  be  supposed)  and  caution  the  right 
general  guide  and  the  color-bearer  to  face  him,  and 
then  establish  them  by  signal  of  the  sword,  on  the 
direction  which  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  battalion. 
As  soon  as  they  shall  be  coi-rectly  established,  the  left 
general  guide  will  place  himself  on  their  direction, 
and  be  assured  in  his  positi(»n  l)y  the  major.  The  co\- 
or-bearer  will  carry  the  color-lance  pei-pendicularly 
between  his  eyes,  and  the  two  corporals  of  his  rank 
will  return  to  their  places  in  the  front  rank  the  mo- 
ment he  shall  fac«^  to  the  colonel. 


641.     This  disposition  being  made,  the  colonel 
command : 


1.  Guides— On  the  Line. 


Willi 


642.  At  this  command,  the  right  guide  ot  each  com- 
pany in  the  right  wing,  and  the  left  guide  of  each 
company  in  the  left,  will  each  place  himself  on  the  di- 
rection of  the  color-bearer  and  the  two  general  guides, 
face  to  the  coh)r-bearer,  ])lace  himself  in  rear  of  the 
guide  who  is  next  before  him  at  a  distance  equal  to 
the  front  of  his  company,  and  align  himself  upon  the 
color-bearer  and  the  general  guide  beyond. 


'^i 


I 


^: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  V.  145 

643.  The  captains  in  the  right  wing  will  shift  to 
the  left  of  their  companies,  except  the  captain  of  the 
color-company,  who  will  remain  on  its  right,  bnt  step 
into  the  rear  rank  ;  the  captains  in  the  left  wing  will 
shift  to  the  right  of  their  companies, 

644.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  promptly  rectify, 
if  necessary,  the  positions  of  the  guides  of  the  right 
wing,  and  the  major  those  of  the  other ;  which  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command : 

2.  On  the  ccwfre— Dress. 

645.  At  this  command,  the  companies  will  move 
up  in  quick  time  against  the  guides,  where,  having 
arrived,  each  captain  will  align  his  company  accord- 
ing to  prescribed  principles,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
aligning  the  color-company. 

646.  If  the  alignment  be  oblique,  the  captains  will 
take  care  to  conform  their  companies  to  it  in  con- 
ducting them  towards  the  line. 

647.  The  battalion  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

3.   Color  and  guides — POSTS. 

648.  At  this  command,  the  color  bearer,  t  e  gen- 
eral and  company  guides,  and  the  captains  in  the 
right  wing,  will  take  their  places  in  the  line  of  battle, 
and  the  color-bearer  will  replace  the  heel  of  the 
color-lance  against  the  right  hip, 

649.  If  the  new  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  be 
such  that  one  or  more  companies  find  themselves  in 
advance  of  that  line,  the  colonel,  before  establishing 
the  general  guides  on  the  line,  will  cause  such  com- 

10 


146         SCFIOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

panies  to  be  moved  to  the  rear,  either  l)y  the  back 
step,  or  by  first  facing  about,  accordintr  as  there  may 
be  less  or  more  ground  to  be  repassed  to  bring  the 
companies  in  rear  of  the  new  direction. 

650.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  a  general 
alignment,  and  the  color  and  general  guides  are  not 
on  the  line,  he  will  cause  them  to  move  out  by  the 
command  : 

1.   Color  and  scneral  s^iides — On  THE  LiNE. 


651.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  and  the 
general  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  line,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  640. 

Article  Fourth. 

Change  of  direction  in  7iiarching  in  line  of  battle. 

652.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  t>f  battle, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  it  to  change  direction  to 
the  right,  he  will  ctunmand: 

1.   Change   direction  to   the  right.      2.    MARCH    (or 
double  quick— MaRCU). 

653.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will 
commence;  the  color-rank  will  shorten  the  step  to 
fourteen  or  seventeen  inches,  and  direct  itself  circu- 
larly to  the  right,  taking  care  to  advance  the  left 
shoulder,  but  only  insensibly  ;  the  major  will  place 
himself  before  the  color-bearer,  facing  him,  and  so 


r- 


14( 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.         147 

direct  his  march  that  he  may  describe  an  arc  of  a 
circle  neither  too  hirge  nor  too  small ;  he  will  also 
see  that  the  color-bearer  takes  steps,  of  fourteen  or 
seventeen  inches ,  according  to  the  gait. 

654.  The  right  general  guide  will  wheel  on  the 
right  captain  of  the  battalion  as  his  pivot;  the  left 
general  guide  will  circularly  march  in  the  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches  or  thirty-three  inches,  according 
to  the  gait,  and  will  align  himself  upon  the  color- 
bearer  and  the  right  general  guide. 

655.  The  corporal  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  bat- 
talion, will  take  steps  of  fourteen  or  seventeen 
inches,  and  will  wheel  to  the  right  by  advancing  in- 
sensibly the  left  shoulder;  the  battalion  will  conform 
itself  to  the  movement  of  the  centre;  to  this  end,  the 
captain  of  the  color-company,  and  the  captain  of  the 
next  to  the  left,  will  attentively  regulate  their  march, 
as  well  as  the  direction  of  their  shoulders,  on  the 
three  centre  corporals.  All  the  other  captains  will 
regulate  the  direction  of  their  shoulders  and  the 
length  of  their  step  on  this  basis. 

656.  The  men  will  redouble  their  attention  in  order 
not  to  pass  the  line  of  captains. 

657.  In  the  left  wing,  the  pace  will  be  lengthened 
in  proportion  as  the  file  is  distant  from  the  centre; 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  who  closes  the 
left  flank  of  the  battahon  will  take 'steps  of  twenty- 
eight  or  thirty-three  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

658.  In  the  right  wing  the  pace  will  be  shortened 
in  porportion  as  the  file  is  distant  from  the.  centre  ; 
the  captain  who  closes  the  right  flank  will  only  slowly 


148         .SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

tui'D  in  his  person,  observing  to  yield  ground  a  little 
if  pushed. 

659.  The  colonel  will  tal^e  great  care  to  prevent 
the  centre  of  the  battalion  from  describing  an  arc  of 
a  circle,  either  too  great  or  too  small,  in  order  that 
the  wings  may  conform  themselves  to  its  movement. 
He  will  see  also  that  the  captains  keep  their  com- 
panies constantly  aligned  upon  the  centre,  so  that 
there  may  be  no  opening  and  no  crowding  of  files. 
He  will  endeavor  to  prevent  faults,  and,  should  they 
occur,  correct  them  without  noise. 

660.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  before  the  bat- 
talion, will  give  his  attention  to  the  same  object. 

661.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  direct  march 
to  be  resumed,  he  will  command: 

1.  Forward.      2.  March. 

662.  At  the  command  march,  the  color-rank,  the 
general  guides,  and  the  battalion  will  resume  the 
direct  march;  the  major  will  immediately  place  him- 
self thirty  or  forty  pace«  in  front,  face  to  the  colonel, 
placed  in  rear  of  the  centre,  who  will  establish  him 
by  signal  of  the  sword  on  the  perpeiulicular  direc- 
tion which  the  corporal  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion 
ought  to  pursue;  the  major  will  immediately  cause 
the  color-bearer,  if  necessaiy,  t«)  incline  to  the  right 
or  left,  so  as  to  be  exactly  opposite  to  his  file ;  the 
color-bearer  will  then  take  two  points  on  the  ground 
between  himself  and  the  uiajor. 

663.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  endeavor  to  give 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  V.  149 

to  the  color-company  and  the  next  on  the  left  a  direc- 
tion perpendicular  to  that  pursued  by  the  centre 
corporal ;  and  all  the  other  companies,  without  pre- 
cipitancy, will  conform  themselves  to  that  basis. 

Article  Fifth. 

To  march  in  retreat,  in  line  of  battle. 

064.  The  battalion  being  halted,  if  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  colonel  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Face  to  the  rear.     2.    Battalion,  about — Face. 

665.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
face  about;  the  color-rank,  and  the  general  guides, 
it  in  advance,  will  take  their  places  in  line  ;  the  col- 
or-bearer will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  leading; 
the  corporal  of  his  file  will  step  behind  the  corporal 
next  on  his  own  right,  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass, 
and  then  step  into  the  front  rank,  now  rear,  to  re- 
form the  color-file  ;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  be- 
hind the  front  rank,  become  the  rear  ;  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  major  will  place  themselves  before  the 
rear  rank,  now  leading. 

666.  The  colonel  will  take  post  forty  paces  behind 
the  color-file,  in  order  to  assure  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel on  the  perpendicular,  who  will  place  himself  at  a 
like  distance  in  front,  as  prescribed  for  the  advance 
in  line  of  battle. 

667.  If  the  battalion  be  the  one  charged  with  the 
direction,  the  colonel  will  establish  markers  in  the 


150  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

manner  indicated,  No.  589,  except  that  they -will  face 
to  the  battalion,  and  that  the  first  will  be  placed  twen- 
ty-five paces  from  the  lieutenant  cctlonei.  If  the  ni;ir- 
kers  be  already  established,  the  officer  charged  with 
replacing  them  in  succession  will  cause  them  to  face 
about,  the  moment  that  the  battalion  executes  this 
movement,  and  then  the  marker  nearest  to  the  bat- 
talion will  hasten  to  the  rear  of  the  two  others. 

668.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

3.  Battalion,  foricard. 

669.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  will  ad- 
vance six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file  closers,  ac- 
companied by  the  two  coi-porals  of  his  guard  of  that 
rank,  the  centre  corporal  stepping  back  to  let  the 
color-bearer  pass ;  the  two  file  closers  nearest  this 
centre  corporal  will  unite  on  him  behind  the  color- 
guard  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  aligmnent  for  the  line  of 
file  cUisers;  the  two  general  guides  will  place  them- 
selves abreast  with  the  color  rank,  the  covering  ser- 
geants will  place  themselves  in  the  line  of  file  closers, 
and  the  captains  in  the  rear  rank,  now  leading ;  the 
captains  in  the  left  wing,  now  right,  will  if  not  al- 
ready there,  shift  to  the  left  of  their  companies  now 
become  the  right. 

670.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 
4.  March  (or  double  quick — March  J. 

671.  The  battalion  will  march  in  retreat  on  the 
same  principles  which  govern  the  advance  inline;  the ; 


SCH'>fL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  151 

centre  corporal  behind  the  color-bearer  will  march 
exactly  in  his  trace. 

672.  If  it  be  the  directing  battalion,  the  color-bear- 
er will  direct  himself  on  the  markers,  who  will,  of 
their  own  accord,  each  place  himself  in  succession 
behind  the  marker  most  distant,  on  being  approached 
by  the  battalion  :  the  officer  charged  with  the  super- 
intendence of  the  markers,  will  carefully  assure  them 
on  the  direction. 

G73  In  the  case  of  a  subordinate  battalion,  the 
color-bearer  will  maintain  hiniself  on  the  perpendicu- 
lar by  means  of  points  taken  on  the  ground. 

674.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  and  major  will 
each  discharge  the  same  functions  as  in  the  advance 
in  line. 

675.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  on  the  outside 
of  the  file  closers  of  the  color-company,  will  also 
maintain  the  three  file  closers  of  the  basis  of  align- 
ment in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction  :  the  other 
file  closers  will  keep  themselves  aligned  on  this  basis. 

Article  Sixth. 

I  To  halt  the  battalion  marching  in  retreat,  and  to  face  it 
to  the  front. 

676.  The  colonel  having  halted  the  battalion,  and 
(wishing  to  face  it  to  the  front,  will  command : 

1.  Face  to  the  front.     2.  Battalion,  about — FACE. 

677.  At  the  second  command,  the  color-rank,  gene- 


152         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALKJN— PART  V. 

ral  guides,  captains,  and  covering  sergeants,  will  all 
retake  their  liahitual  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the 
color-bearer  will  repass  into  the  front  rank. 


678.  The  battalion   marching  in  line  of  battle  by 
the  front  rank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  nia 
it  in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion,  rifrJit  about.     2.  MARCH. 


rch    1 


679.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  battalion,  will  ftice 
to  the  rear  and  move  off  at  the  same  gait  by  the  rear 
rank.  The  principles  prescribed  Nos.  C69,  and  follow- 
ing will  be  carefully  observed. 

680.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion  to 
march  again  by  the  front,  he  will  give  the  same  com- 
mands. 

Article  Seventh. 

Change  of  direction,  in  inarching  in  retreat. 

681.  A  battalion  retiring  in  line  will  change  direc- 
tion by  the  commands  and  means  indicated  No.  652 
and  following ;  the  three  file  closers,  united  behind 
the  color-rank,  will  ccmform  themselves  to  the  move- 
ment of  this  rank,  and  wheel  like  it;  the  centre  file 
closer  of  the  three  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  or 
seventeen  inches,  according  to  the  gait,  and  keep 
himself  steadily  at  the  same  distance  tVoui  the  color- 
bearer;  the  line  of  file  closers  will  conform  themselves 
to  the  uiovement  of  its  centre,  and  the  lieutenant 
colonel  will  maintain  it  on  that  basis. 


school  of  the  battalion— part  v.   153 

Article  Eighth. 
Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and  retreating. 

682.  The  battalion  advancii;g  in  line  will  be  sup- 
posed to  encounter  an  obstacle  which  covers  one  or 
more  companies ;  the  colonel  will  cause  them  to 
ploy  into  column  at  full  distance,  in  rear  of  the  next 
company  towards  the  color,  which  will  be  executed 
in  the  lollowing  manner.  It  will  be  supposed  that 
the  obstacle  only  covers  the  third  cc-mpany,  the 
colonel  will  command  ; 

Third  company,  obstacle. 

683.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  third 
company  will  place  himself  in  its  front,  turn  to  it, 
and  command,  1.  Third  company,  by  the  left  flank,  to 
the  rear  into  column.  2.  Double  quick.  'S.  MARCH. 
He  will  then  hasten  to  the  left  of  his  company. 

684.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
face  to  the  left  in  marching;  the  two  left  files  will 
promptly  disengage  to  the  rear  in  double  quick  time ; 
the  left  guide,  placing  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
front  rank,  will  conduct  it  behind  the  fourth  compa- 
ny, directing  himself  parallelly  with  this  company  ; 
the  captain  of  the  third  will  himself  halt  opposite  to 
the  captain  of  the  fourth,  and  see  his  company  file 
past ;  when  its  right  file  shall  be  nearly  up  with  him, 
he  will  command,  1.  Third  company.  2.  By  the  right 
flank.  3.  March.  4.  Guide  right,  and  place  him- 
self before  the  centre  of  his  company. 


154  sen  )0L  OF  THE  BAITALION-PART  V. 

685.  At  the  command  march,  tKe  c<mipany  will  face 
to  the  right,  preserving  the  same  gait,  but  the  mo- 
ment it  shall  be  at  the  prescribed  distance,  its  cap- 
tain will  command: 

1.   Q^idck  time.     2.  MARCH. 

686.  This  company  will  thus  follow  in  column  that 
behind  which  it  finds  itself,  and  at  wheeling  distance, 
its  right  guide  marching  exactly  in  the  trace  cf  the 
captain  of  that  company. 

687.  As  soon  as  the  third  company  shall  have  fac- 
ed to  the  left,  the  left  guide  of  the  second  will  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  his  company, 
and  maintain  between  himself  and  the  right  of  the 
fourth  the  space  necessary  for  the  return  into  line  of 
the  third. 

688.  The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Third  company ,  forward,  into  line. 

689.  At  this  command,  the  captain  turning  to  his 
company,  will  add : 

1.  By  company,  right  half  ichecl.      2.     Double  quick. 
3.  March. 


600.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
take  the  double  quick  step,  and  execute  a  half  wheel ; 
its  captain  will  then  connnand,  1,  Forward.  2. 
MaI{CI1.  3.  Guide  left.  The  second  command  will 
be  given  when  the  company  shall  have  sufficiently 
wheeled. 


•«3&^| 


^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  155 

691.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
clireet  itself  straight  forward  towards  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  retake  its  position  in  it  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  for  the  formation  forward  into  line 
of  battle. 

692.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  covers 
several  contiguous  companies  (the  three  companies 
on  the  right  for  example),  the  colonel  will  com 
mand  : 

.  Three  right  companies,  obstacle.  2.  By  the  left 
flank,  to  the  rear,  into  column.  3.  Double  quick 
— March. 

693.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the 
designated  companies  will  each  place  himself  before 
the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  as  to  the 
movement  about  to  be  executed. 

694.  At  the  command  march,  the  designated  com- 
panies will  face  to  the  left  in  marching,  and  imme- 
diately take  the  double  quick  step  ;  each  captain  will 
cause  the  head  of  his  company  to  disengage  itself  to 
the  rear,  and  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the 
head  of  the  front  rank;  the  captain  of  the  third  com- 
pany will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
684  and  following;  the  captains  of  the  other  com- 
panies will  conduct  them  by  the  flank  in  rear  of  the 
third,  inclining  towards  the  head  of  the  column  ;  and, 
as  the  head  of  each  company  arrives  opposite  to  the 
right  of  the  one  next  before  it  in  column,  its  captain 
will  himself  halt,  see  his  company  file  past,  and  con- 
form himself  for  facing  it  to  the  front,  in  marching, 
to  what  is  prescribed  No.  684,  and  following. 


156  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

695.  When  the  last  company  in  column  shall 
have  passed  the  obstacle,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   Three  rigid  companies,  foncard,   into  line. 

69G.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  these  ^ 
three  companies   will   command,  By  company,  right 
half  wheel.     The  colonel  will  then  add : 


1.  Double  quick.    2.  March. 

697.  At  this,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains  of 
the  three  companies,  each  company  will  conform  it- 
self to  what  is  prescribed  No.  690  and  following. 

698.  It  is  supposed,  in  the  foregoing  examples, 
that  the  companies  belonged  to  the  right  wing ;  if 
they  make  part  of  the  other,  they  will  execute  the 
passage  of  an  obstacle  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples and  by  inverse  means. 

699.  When  flank  companies  are  broken  oflf  to 
pass  an  obstacle,  the  general  guide  on  that  flank 
will  place  himself  six  paces  in  front  of  the  outer  file 
of  the  nearest  company  to  him  remaining  in  line. 

700.  In  the  preceding  movements,  it  has  been  sup- 
posed that  the  battalion  was  marching  in  quick  time, 
but  if  it  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  and  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  several  contiguous  com- 
panies to  break  to  the  rear,  he  will  first  order  the 
battalion  to  march  in  quick  time  ;  the  companies 
will  break  as  indicated  No.  692. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  157 

701.  When  the  movement  is  completed,  the  colo- 
ael  will  order  the  double  quick  step  to  be  resumed. 
He  will  also  cause  the  battalion  to  march  in  quick 
time  when  he  shall  wish  to  bring  into  line  the  sev- 
eral companies  which  are  to  the  rear  in  column  ; 
the  movement  will  be  executed  as  previously  indica- 
ted ;  and  when  the  last  company  shall  have  nearly 
completed  its  movement,  the  colonel  will  cause  the 
double  quick  step  to  be  resumed.     • 

702.  In  the  movement  of  a  single  company,  or  of 
iseveral  companies  not  contiguous  to  each  otlier,  the 
battalion  will  continue  to  march  in  double  quick 
time,  but  in  these  cases  the  companies  which  are  to 
ploy  into  column,  or  re-enter  the  line,  will  increase 
the  gait, 

703.  In  the  march  in  retreat,  these  several  move- 
ments will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  if 
the  battalion  marched  by  the  front  rank. 


704.  When  a  battalion,  advancing  in  line  of  battle, 
shall  be  obliged  to  execute  the  right  about  in  order 
to  retreat,  if  there  be  companies  in  column,  behind 
the  rear  rank,  these  companies  will  also  execute  the 
right  about,  put  themselves  in  march,  at  the  same 
time  with  the  battalion,  and  will  thus   precede  it  in 

;  the  retreat;  they   will  afterwards   successively  put 

j  themselves   into  line   by    the  oblique    step,   as  the 

I  ground  may  permit. 

[' 

,  705.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  retreat  in 
double  quick  time,  and  many  contiguous  companies, 
be  marching  before  the  rear  rank  of  the   battalion, 


158         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

the  colonel  will  not  change  the  gait  of  the   battalion 
in  causing  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 

706.  When  the  color-company  shall  be  obliged  to 
execute  the  movement  of  passing  an  obstacle,  the 
color-rank  will  return  into  line  at  the  moment  the 
company  shall  face  to  the  left  or  right;  the  major 
will  place  himself  six  paces  before  the  extremity  of 
the  company  betrind  which  the  color-company  marches 
in  column,  in  order  to  give  the  step  and  the  direc- 
tion; he,  himself,  fiist  taking  the  step  from  the  bat- 
talion. 

707.  As  soon  as  the  color-company  shall  have  re- 
turned into  line,  the  front  rank  of  the  col<»r  guard 
will  again  move  out  six  paces  in  front  of  the  battal- 
ion, and  take  the  step  from  the  major;  the  latter 
will  immediately  place  himself  twenty  or  thirty 
paces  in  front  of  the  color-bearer,  and  face  to  the 
colonel  placed  behind  the  centre  of  the  battalion, 
who  will  establish  him  on  the  perpendicular;  and,  as 
soon  as  he  shall  be  assured  on  it,  the  color-bearer 
will  instantly  take  two  points  on  the  ground  between 
himself  and  the  major. 

708.  It  is  prescribed,  as  a  general  rule,  that  the 
companies  of  the  right  wing  ought  to  execute  the 
movement  of  passing  obstacles  by  the  left  flank,  and 
the  reverse  for  the  companies  of  the  other  wing  ;  but 
if  the  obstacle  cover  at  once  several  companies  of  the 
centre,  each  will  file  into  column  behind  that,  still  in 
line,  and  of  the  same  wing,  which  may  be  the  nearest 
to  it. 


/J± 


R 


7/ 


JE'liiliillilllllliiilk 
b. 


school  of  the  battalion— part  v.       159 

Article  Ninth. 
To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the  right   or  left  fiank. 

709.  When  a  battalion,  retiring  in  line,  shall  en- 
counter a  defile  which  it  must  pass,  the  colonel  will 
halt  the  battalion,  and  face  it  to  the  front. 

710.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  in  rear  of 
the  left  flank,  and  that  its  width  ie  sufficient  to  give 
passage  to  a  column  by  platoon ;  the  colonel  will 
place  a  marker  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
file  closers  at  the  point  around  which  the  subdivisions 
will  have  to.change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the 
defile  ;  he  will  then  command  : 

To  the  rear,  by  the  right  flank,  pass  the   defile. 

711.  The  captain  of  the  first  comp-^ny  will  imme- 
diately command  : 

1.  First  company,  right — Face.    2.  March  (or 
double  quick — March.) 

712.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  company 
will  commence  the  movement ;  the  first  file  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  march  to  the  rear  till  it  shall 
have  passed  four  paces  beyond  the  file  closers,  when 
it  will  wheel  again  to  the  right,  and  tlien  direct  it- 
self straight  for  waid  towards  the  left  flank.  All  the 
other  files  of  this    company    will    come    to  wheel 


160  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

in  succession  at  the  same  place  where  the  first  had 
wheeled. 

713.  The  second  company  will  execute,  in  its  turn, 
the  same  movement,  by  the  commaiuls  of  its  captain, 
who  will  give  the  connnand  March,  so  that  the  first 
file  of  his  company  may  immediately  follow  the  hist 
of  the  first,  without  constraint,  however,  as  to  tak- 
ing the  step  of  the  first;  the  first  file  of  the  second 
company  will  wheel  to  the  right,  on  its  ground  ;  all 
the  other  files  of  this  company  will  come  in  succes- 
sion to  wheel  at  the  same  place.  The  following 
companies  will  execute,  each  in  its  turn,  what  h;is 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

714.  When  the  whole  of  the  second  company  shall 
be  on  the  same  direction  with  the  firsts  the  captain 
of  the  first  will  cause  it  to  form,  by  platoons  into 
line,  and  the  m<»ment  that  it  is  in  column,  the  guide 
of  the  first  platoon  will  direct  himself  on  the  marker 
around  whom  he  has  to  change  direction  in  order  to 
enter  the  defile. 

715.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march 
by  the  flank,  directing  itself  parallelly  with  the  lino 
of  battle;  and  it,  in  its  turn,  will  form  by  platoon 
into  line,  when  the  third  company  shall  be  wholly  on 
the  same  direction  with  itself. 

716.  The  following  companies  will  succegsivelf, 
execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  ti>r  the  se- 
cond, and  each  will  form  by  platoon  into  line,  when 
the  next  company  shall  be  on  the  same  direction  with 
itself. 

717.  The  first  platoon  of  the  leading  company  hav- 
ing arrived  opposite  to  the  marker  placed  at  the  er:- 
trance  of  the  defile,  will  turn  to  the  left,  and  the  fol- 


I 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V,  161 

lowing  platoons  will  all  execute  this  movement  at  the 
same  point.  As  the  last  companies  will  not  be  able 
to  form  platoons  before  reaching  the  defile,  they  will 
j  so  direct  themselves,  in  entering  it,  as  to  leave  room 
to  the  left  for  this  movement. 

718.  The  battalion  wall  thus  pass  the  defile  by  pla- 
jtoon:  and,  as  the  two  platoons  of  each  company 
I  shall  clear  it,  companies  will  be   successively  formed 

by  the  means  indicated,  school  of  the  company,  No. 

273,  and  following. 


719.  The  head  of  the  column  having  cleared  the 
defile,  and  having  reached  the  distance  at  which  the 
colonel  wishes  to  re-form  line  faced  to  the  defil ».,  he 
may  cause  the  leading  company  to  turn  to  the  left, 
to  prolong  the  column  in  that  direction,  and  then 
form  it  to  the  left  into  line  of  battle ;  or  he  may  halt 
the  column,  and  form  it  into  line  of  battle  faced  to  the 
rear. 

720.  If  the  defile  be  in  the  rear  of  the  right  flank, 
it  will  be  passed  by  the  left ;  the  movement  wull  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 
inverse  means. 

721.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  receive  the 
front  of  a  platoon,  it  will  be  passed  by  the  flank. 
Captains  and  file  closers  will  be  watchful  that  the 
files  do  not  lose  their  distances  in  marching.  Com- 
panies or  platoons  will  be  formed  into  line  as  the 
width  of  the  defile  may  permit,  or  as  the  companies 
shall  successively  clear  it. 


11 


162       school  of  the  battalion— part  v. 
Article  Tenth. 

To  march  by  the  JJtnik. 

722.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  battalicu  to  inarch 
by  the  flank,  will  command  ; 

1.  Battalion.    2.  Right  (or  /r/>)— Face.    3.  Forward. 
4.  March  for  double  quick — March). 

723.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  and 
covering  sergeants  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed, 
Nos.  13G  and  141,  school  of  the  company. 

724.  The  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  will 
place  himself  to  the  left  and  by  the  side  of  the  last 
file  of  his  company,  covering  the  captains  in  file. 

72.5.  The  battalion  having  to  face  by  the  left 
flank,  the  cii[)tains,  at  the  sec(»nd  connnand,  will 
shift  rapidly  to  the  left  of  their  cximpanies,  and  each 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  th'  covering  sergeant  of 
the  company  preceding  his  own,  except  the  captain 
of  the  left  company,  who  will  place  himself  by  the 
side  of  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion.  The 
covering  sei'geant  of  the  right  company  will  place 
himself  i)y  the  right  side  of  the  front  rank  man  of 
the  rearmost  file  of  his  company,  covering  the  cap- 
tains in  file. 

726.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  step 
off  with  life;  the  sergeant,  pliiced  before  the  leading 
file  (right  or  left  in  front),  will  be  careful  to  pre- 
serve exactly  the  length  and  cadence  otthe  step,  and 


^6Z. 

f-'-Sd 

-       > 

1     1     1     1    1 

1     i     1     i    1 

1  1  r"i  '1 

1   !   1   :  1 

1  '1   M  1 

1     1  -4.   1    1 

1  J    i   1   1 

Ml    M    1    1 

i    1    1    ;   1 

1  1  1    '   1 

1'  1    1    1   1 

Mill 

1     I    M    1 

1     1    1    1    i 

i                                1    1    l|    . 

1     1    1    1    1 

Mill 

1                          Mill 

II    1   1  1 

II    1   1   1 

1    1    1'  M 

Mill 

i 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  HATTALION— PART  V.  163 

to  direct  himself  straight    forward;  to  this   end,  he 
will  take  points  on  the  ground. 

727.  Whether  the  battalion  march  by  the  right  or 
l.tr  flank,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself 
al "least  with  the  leading  file,  and  the  major  abreast 
with  the  color-file,  both  on  the  side  of  the  front 
riiiik,  and  about  six  paces  from  it. 

7-28.  The  adjutant,  placed  between  the  lieutenant 
Cdlouel  and  the  front  rank,  will  march  in  the  same 
slej)  with  the  head  of  the  battalion,  and  the  ser- 
ircant  major,  placed  between  the  major  and  the  color- 
liciirer,  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  adju- 
tant. 

729.  The  captains  and  file  closers  will  carefully  see 
that  the  files  neither  open  out,  nor  close  too  much, 
and  that  they  regain   insensibly    their    distances,  if 

Inst. 

730.  The  colonel  wishing  the  battalion  to  wheel  by 
file,  will  command : 


1.  By  file  right  (or  left).     2.  March. 


tb 


31.  The  files  will  wheel  in  succession,  and  all  at 
place  where  the  first  had  wheeled,  in  conforming 
to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
company. 

732.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  it  to  halt,  he  wiil  command  ; 

1.  Battalion.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 

723.  These  commands  will  be   executed  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  146. 


164         SCHOOL  OF  TPIE  BATTALION-PART  V. 

734.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  by  the  flank  and 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  line, 
either  to  the  front  or  to  the  rear,  the  movements 
will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company. 


Article  Eleventh. 

To  form  the  battalion  on  the    right  or    Icfl,    by  file, 
into  line  of  battle. 

735.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  foini  it  on  the  right  by 
file,  he  will  determine  the  lin^  of  battle,  and  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  place  two  markers  on  that 
line,  iu  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed,  No.  415, 

736.  The  head  of  the  battalion  being  nearly  up 
with  the  first  marker,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  right,  by   file,   into  line.      2,  March  Cor 
double  quick— March). 

737.  At  the  command  7narch,ihG  leading  company 
will  form  itself  on  the  right,  by  file,  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, as  indicated  in  the  scho(»l  of  the  company.  No. 
141) ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  first  file  will  rest  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  the  first 
marker  ;  the  other  companies  will  follow  the  move- 
ment of  the  leading  company;  each  captain  will 
place  himself  on  the  line  at  the  same  time  with  the 
front  rank  man  of  bis  first  file, -and  on  the  right  of 
this  man. 


i 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.   •       165 

738.  The  left  guide  of  each  company,  except  the 
leading  one,  will  place  himself  on  the   direction  of 

:  the  markers,  and  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  his  com- 
i  pany,  at  the  instant  that  the  front  rank  man  of  this 
file  arrives  on  the  line. 

739.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
(  command : 

Guides — Posts, 

740.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  successive 
formation  of  the  battalion,  moving  along  the  front  of 
the  line  of  battle, 

741.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will,  in  succession,  as- 
sure the  direction  of  the  guides,  and  see  that  the  men 
of  the  front  rank,  in  placing  themselves  on  the  line, 
do  not  pass  it. 

742.  If  the  battalion  march  by  the  left  flank,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

Article  Twelfth. 

Changes  of  front. 
Change  of  front  perpendicularly  foricard. 

743.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  it  is  sup- 
posed to  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  a  change 
of  front  forward  on  the  right  company,  and  that  the 
angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new  positions  be  a  right 
angle,  or  a  few  degrees  more  or  less  than  one ;  he 
will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the  new 
direction,  before  the  position  to  be  occupied  by  that 


1G6         SCHOOL  ON  THE  BATTALION— P.MIT  V. 

company,  and  order  its  captain  to  establish  it  against 
the  markers. 

744.  The  captain  of  the  right  company  will  imme- 
diately direct  it  upon  the  markers  by  a  wheel  to  the 
right  on  the  fixed  pivot ;  and"  after  having  halted  it, 
he  will  align  it  by  the  right. 

745.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 


1.  Change  from  foricurd  on  first  company.  2.  By 
company,  rio/tt  half  tchcel.  3.  MARCH  [or  double 
quick— March']. 

746.  At  the  second  command,  each  captain  will 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company. 

747.  At  the  third,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the 
right  on  the  fixed  pivot ;  the  left  guide  of  each  will 
place  himself  on  its  left  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  able 
to  pass;  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  that  the 
corapanies  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.  G.  Guide  right. 

748.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  ceasing 
to  wheel  will  march  straiglit  forward  ;  at  the  sixth, 
the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right. 

749.  The  right  guide  of  the  second  company  \\\\\ 
march  straightforward  until  this  company  shall  arrive 
at  the  point  where  it  should  turn  to  the  right;  each, 
succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the  file  immediately 
before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel,  and  will 
march  in  the  trace  of  this  fileuntil  this  company  shall 


■  ^~  /^ 


1C6         S( 

company 
the  niarl< 

744.  T 
diately  di 
right  on 
he  will  al 

745.  Ti 
will  coini 

1.  Chang 
compan 
quick— 

746.  At 
place  him 

747.  At 
right  on  t, 
place  hill 
to  pass ;  a 
coiiij)anie6 
mand: 

4.  F 

748.  At 
to  wheel  v 
the  men  w 

749.  Th 
march  stra 
at  the  poll 
succeedinjy 
before  liii: 
march  in  t 


SCHOOL  OF  THK  BATTALI'  N— PART  V.    167 

turn  to  the  right  to  move  upon  the   line ;  this  guide 
will  then  march  straight  forward. 

750.  The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite 
to  the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  captfiin  will  cause  it  to 
turn  to  the  right ;  the  right  guide  will  direct  him- 
self so  as  to  arrive  squarely  upon  the  line  of  battle, 
and  when  he  shall  be  at  three  paces  from  that  line, 
the  captain  will  command : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  HALT. 

751.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt;  the  files  not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  will  come 
into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place  himself 
on  the  line  of  battle,  and,  as  soon  as  he  is  assured  in 
the  direction  by  the  lieutenant  colonel,  the  captain 
will  align  the  company  by  the  right. 

7o2.  Each  following  company  will  conform  to  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 


75:^.  The  forniation  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides— VOSTS. 

754.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  change  front  forward  on  the  first  com- 
pany, and  that  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new 
positions  be  a  right  angle,  he  will  cause  two  markers 
to  be  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the  position 
to  be  occupied  by  that  company,  and  will  command : 


168  SCH  )   L  (F  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

].  Change  front  forward  on  frst  company.  2.  By 
company^  right  half  tcheel.  3.  March  [or  double 
quick — March]. 

755.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  move 
rapidly  before  the  centre  of  their  respective  com- 
panies; the  captain  of  the  first  company  will  com- 
mand: 1.  Right  turn;  2.  Quick  time;  the  captains 
of  the  other  companies  will  caution  them  to  wheel 
to  the  right. 

756.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  company 
will  turn  to  the  right  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402 ;  its 
captain  will  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the  markers, 
and  the  files  in  rear  will  promptly  come  into  line. 
The  captain  will  align  the  company  by  the  right. 

757.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to 
the  right  on  a  fixed  ])ivot;  the  left  guides  will  place 
themselves  on  the  left  of  their  respective  companies, 
and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  they  have  wheeled 
sufficiently,  he  will  command  : 

4.  Forward.     5.  MARCH.     6.   Guide  right. 

758.  These  commands  will  bo  executed  as  indicated 
No.  746  and  following. 

759.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  battjilion  to  change 
front  forward  on  the  eighth  company  according  to 
the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALI  N— PART  V.    169 


Change  of  front  perpendicularly  to  the  rear. 

760.  The  colonel  wishing  to  change  front  to  the 
rear  on  tlie  right  company,  will  impart  his  purpose  to 
the  captain  of  this  company.  The  latter  will  im- 
mediately face  this  company  abont,  wheel  it  to  the 
left  on  the  fixed  pivot,  and  halt  it  when  it  shall  be  in 
the  direction  indicated  to  him  by  the  colonel :  the  cap- 
tain will  then  face  his  company  to  the  front,  and  align 
it  by  the  riglit  against  the  two  markers,  whom  the 
colonel  will  cause  to  be  established  before  the  right 
and  left  files. 

Tfi].  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 


1.  Change  front  to  the  rear,  on  first  company.  2.  Bat- 
talion about — Face.  3.  By  company,  left  half 
wheel.     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

762.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
except  the  right,  will  face  about. 

763.  At  the  third,  the  captains,  whose  companies 
have  faced  about,  wnll  each  place  himself  behind  the 
centre  of  his  company,  two  paces  from  the  front 
rank,  now  the  rear. 

764.  At  the  fourth,  these  companies  will  wheel  to 
the  left  on  the  fixed  pivot  by  the  rear  rank:  the  left 
guide  of  each  will,  as  soon  as  he  is  able  to  pass, 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  of  his  com- 
pany, now  become  the  right ;  and  when  the  colonel 
shall  judge  that  the  companies  have  sufficiently 
wheeled,  he  will  command : 


170  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 


5.  Foiicard.     6.  March.     7.  Guide  left. 

765.  At  the  sixth  command,  the  companies  will 
cease  to  wheel,  march  straight  forward  towards  the 
•Jew  line  of  battle,  and,  at  the  seventh,  take  the 
touch  of  the  elbow  towards  the  left. 

7*56.  The  guide  of  each  company  on  its  right  flank, 
become  left,  will  conform  himself  to  the  principles 
prescribed,  No.  748. 

767.  The  second  company,  from  the  right,  having 
arrived  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  first,  will  turn  to 
the  left;  the  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  arrive 
parallelly  with  the  line  of  battle,  cross  that  line,  and 
when  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  shall  be  three 
paces  beyond  it,  the  captain  will  connnand;  ].  .Se- 
cond  company ;  2.  HALT. 

768.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt;  the  files  yvhich  may  not  yet  be  in  line  with  the 
guide,  will  pr(»!m])tly  come  into  it ;  the  ciii)tain  will 
cause  the  company  to  face  about,  and  then  align  it  by 
the  right. 

769.  All  the  other  companies  will  execute  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  f«»r  the  second,  each  as  it 
successively  arrives  npposite  to  the  left  of  the  com- 
pany that  precedes  it  on  the  new  line  of  battle. 

770.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  coloiu'l  will 
command  : 

Gwirics— Posts. 

771.  The  colonel  will  cause  a  change  of  front  on 
the  left  company  of  the  battalion  to  the  rear,  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 


SBHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION- PART  V.  171 

772.  In  changes  of  front,  the  colonel  will  give  a 
general  superintendence  to  the  movement. 

773.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  direc- 
tion of  the  guides  as  they  successively  move  out  on 
the  line  of  battle,  conforming  himself  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  successive  formations. 


Remarks  on  changes  of  front. 


774.  When  a  new  direction  is  perpendicular,  or 
nearly  so,  to  that  of  the  battalion,  the  companies  ought 
to  make  about  a  half  tcheel  (the  eighth  of  the  circle) 
before  marching  straight  forward;  but  when  those 
two  lines  are  oblique  to  each  other,  the  smaller  the 
angle  which  they  form,  the  less  ought  the  companies 
to  wheel.  It  is  for  the  colonel  to  judge,  according  to 
the  angle,  the  precise  time  when  he  ought  to  give  the 
command  march,  after  the  caution /oru-art?,  and  if  he 
cannot  catch  the  exact  moment,  the  word  of  execu- 
tion should  rather  be  given  a  little  too  soon,  than  an 
instant  too  late. 


775.  When  the  old  and  the  new  lines  form  an  angle 
of  forty-five  or  fewer  degrees,  the  colonel  will  find  it 
necessary  to  arrest  the  wheel  of  the  companies  when 
the  marching  flanks  shall  have  taken  but  a  few  paces, 
or,  it  may  be,  have  but  disengaged,  respectively,  from 
the  fixed  pivots  of  the  next  companies ;  and  in  all  such 
cases,  the  companies  will  arrive  so  nearly  parallel  to 
the  new  line,  as  to  be  able  to  align  themselves  upon 
it  without  the  intermediate  turn  to  the  right  or  left : 


172         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

to  execute  the  movement  under  either  circumstanc 
supposed,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Oblique  change  of  front,  foricard,  (or  to  the  rear)  on 

{such  company.) 

Article  Thirteenth. 

To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  doubled  on  the  centre. 

776.  This  movement  consists  in  ploying;  the  corres- 
ponding companies  of  the  right  and  left  wings  into 
column  at  company  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  ia 
rear  of  the  two  centre  companies,  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed.  Article  Tliird,  Part  Second,  of 
this  School. 

777.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  form  the  double  col 
umn  at  company  distance,  (the  battalion  being  in  line 
of  battle,)  will  command: 

1.  Double  column,  at  half  distance.  2.  Battalion,  in- 
wards—Face.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

778.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  in  front  of  tlieir  respective  com- 
panies; the  captains  of  the  two  centre  companies  will 
caution  them  to  stand  fast,  and  the  otiier  captains 
will  caution  tlieir  companies  to  face  to  the  left  and 
right,  respectively.  The  covering  sergeants  will  step 
into  the  front  rank. 


ZJ^ 


^'WHW^mr-^fT       .**■ 


H^.l. 


''iiiBjsBTCasr 


172 

to  ex 
suppc 

Obliq> 


Topi 

776 
pondi 
eoluu 
rear  ( 
princi 
thisS 

777 
uran  { 
of  ba 

1.  Dc 
wai 
Ma 

778 
tbems 
paniei 
cauti( 
will  c 
right, 
iuto  t 


SCHO   L  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  173 

779.  At  the  second  command,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
Companies  will  stand  fast;  the  others  of  the  right 
Avii)g  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  others  of  the  left 
w  iiig  will  face  to  the  right;  each  captain  whose  com- 
]i;my  has  faced,  will  hasten  to  break  to  the  rear  the 
two  files  at  the  head  of  his  company  ;  the  left  guide  of 
each  right  company,  and  the  right  guide  of  each  left 
company,  will  each  place  himself  at  the  head  of  its 
front  rank,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  of  his  guide. 

750.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies,  which  are  to  form  the  first  division,  will 
stand  fast;  the  senior  captain  of  the  two  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  the  division,  and  com- 
mand: Guide  right  ;  the  junior  captain  will  place 
himself  in  tlie  interval  between  the  two  companies, 
and  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company  will  place  him- 
self in  the  front  rank  on  the  left  of  the  division,  as 
soon  as  he  shall  be  able  to  pass. 

781.  All  the  other  companies,  conducted  by  their 
captains,  will  step  off  with  life  to  arrange  themselves 
in  column  at  company  distance,  each  company  behind 
the  preceding  one  in  the  column  of  the  same  wing,  so 
that,  in  the  right  wing,  the  third  may  be  next  behind 
the  fourth,  the  second  next  to  the  third,  and  so  on  to 
the  right  company ;  and,  in  the  left  wing,  the  sixth 
may  be  next  behind  the  fifth,  the  seventh  next  to  the 
sixth,  and  so  on  to  the  left  company  of  the  battalion. 

782.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  two  wings 
will  unite  into  divisions  in  arranging  themselves  in 
column  ;  an  instant  before  the  union,  at  the  centre  of 
this  C(»lumn,  the  left  guides  of  right  companies  will 
pass  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  and  each  captain  will 


174  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

command:  1.  Suck  company;  2.  Halt;  3.  Front. 

783.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  of  union,  each  company  will  halt;  at 
the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front.  The  senior  captain 
in  each  division  will  place  himself  on  its  right,  and 
command,  lUg/tt — Dress,  and  the  junior  captain  will 
place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  com- 
panies. The  division  being  aligned,  its  chief  will 
cemmand  Front,  and  take  his  position  two  pacec  be- 
fore its  centre. 

784.  The  column  being  thus  formed,  the  divisions 
will  take  the  respective  denominations  oi'Jirst,  second, 
third,  &c.,  according  to  position  in  the  column,  be- 
ginning at  the  front. 

785.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  who,  at  the  second 
command  given  by  the  colonel,  will  have  placed  him- 
self at  a  little  more  than  company  distance  in  rear  of 
the  right  guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the 
right  guides  on  the  direction  as  they  successively  ar- 
rive, by  placing  himself  in  their  rear. 

786.  The  nmsic  will  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  ccdumn. 

787.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  form  the 
double  column  at  comi)any  distance  without  halting 
the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Double  column  at  half  distance.     2.  Battalion,  by 

the  right  and  left  funks. 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — Marciij. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOJ^— PART  V.  175 

788.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company  ;  the  cap- 
tains of  the  fourth  and  fifth  will  caution  their  com- 
panies to  march  straight  forvyard  ;  the  other  captains 
will  caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  right  and 
left. 

789.  At  the  command  7nrtrt7t,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  ; 
the  senior  captain  will  place  himself  before  the  cen- 
tre of  his  division  and  command,  Guide  right;  the 
junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  be- 
tween the  two  companies.  The  left  guide  of  the  fifth 
company  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank  of  the  division.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of 
elbows  to  the  right.  The  color  and  general  guides 
will  retake  their  places.  The  three  right  companies 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  three  left  companies  will 
face  to  the  right.  Each  captain  will  break  to  the  rear 
two  files  at  tLe  head  of  his  company;  the  left  guides 
of  the  right  companies,  and  the  right  guides  of  the 
left  companies,  will  each  place  himself  at  the  head 
of  the  front  rank  of  his  company,  and  the  captain  by 
the  side  of  his  guide. 

790.  The  third  and  sixth  companies  will  enter  the 
Icolumn  and  direct  themselves  parallelly  to  the  first 

"ivision.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will,  in  like 
|manner,  place  itself  behind  the  company  of  the  wing 
which  it  belongs,  and  will  be  careful  to  gain  as 
luch  ground  as  possible  towards  the  head  of  the 
jolumn. 

79J.  The  corresponding  companies  of  each  wing 
[will  ufiite  into  divisions  on  taking  their  positions  in 
polumn,  and  each  captain,  the  instant  the  head  of  his 


176         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

company  arrives  at  the  centre  of  the  eolunm,  will 
connnancl,  1.  Such  comyany  by  the  right  C«»r  l< ft )  flank. 
2.  March.  The  senior  captain  of  the  two  companies 
will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  «f  his  ilivi- 
sion,  and  command,  Guide  right ;  the  jnnior  captain 
will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two 
companies.  Th(i  two  comj)anies  thns  formed  into  a 
division  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right, 
and  when  each  division  has  gained  its  proj)er  distance, 
its  chief  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

792.  When  the  battaliim  presents  an  odd  number  of  j 
companies,  the  formation  will  be  made  in  like  manner, 
and  the  company  on  either  flank  which  shall  find  it- 
self without  a  corresponding  one,    will  place  itself  at' 
company  distance  behind  the  wing  to  which  it  be- 
longs. 

793.  The  double  column,  closed  in  mass,  will  be  J 
formed  according  to  the  same  princii)le8  and  by  the ; 
same  connnands,  substituting  the  indication,  closcdin\ 
mass,  for  that  of  at  half  distance. 

794.  The  double  column  never  being  formed  when! 
two  or  more  battalions  are  to  be  in  one  general  col- 
umn, it  will  habitually  take  the  guide  to  the  right, 
sometimes  to  the  left,  or  in  the  centre  (»f  the  colunm; 
in  the  last  case,  the  command  will  be,  guide  centre. 
The  colunm  will  march  and  change  direction  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed  for  a  sim])le  column 
by  division. 

795.  The  double  column  at  company  distance  wall 
be   closed  in  mass,  or,  if  in  mass,  will  take  half  dis-j 
tance,  by  the  commands  and  means  indicated  for 
simple  column  by  division. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  177 


Deployment  of  the  double  column,  faced  to  the  front. 

796.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  deploy  the  double  col- 
umn, will  place  a  marker  respectively  before  the  right 
;i  lid  left  files  of  the  first  division,  and  a  third  before 
the  left  file  of  the  right  company,  same  division;  which 
being  done,  he  will  cause  the  two  general  guides  to 
spring  out  on  the  alignment  of  the  markers  a  little  be- 
yond the  points  at  which  the  respective  flanks  of  the 
battalion  ought  to  rest;  he  will  then  command: 

].    Dcploij  column.       2.    Battalion  outicurds — Face. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

797.  The  column  will  depb)y  itself  on  the  two  com- 
panies at  its  head,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  deployment  of  columns  in  mass.  The 
captains  of  these  companies  will  each,  at  the  command 
march,  place  himself  on  the  right  of  his  own  company, 
and  align  it  by  the  right ;  the  captain  of  the  fourth 
will  then  phice  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  and  the  cover 
ing  seigCMut  in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  at  the  moment 
the  capti'.iu  of  the  third  shall  come  to  its  left  to 
align  it. 

798.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 


Guides — POSTS. 

799.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  the  fire 
to  commence  pending  the  deployment,  he  will  give  an 
12 


178         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

order  to  that  effect  to  the  captains  of  the  fmirth  and 
fifth  companies,  and  the  fire  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  438. 

800.  The  battalion  beinii;  in  double  column  and  in 
march,  if  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  cause  three  markers  to 
be  posted  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  the  head  of 
the  column  shall  ari-ive  near  the  markers,  he  will 
command: 


1.   Deploy  column.     2.   Battalion,  hy  the  right  and  left 
flunks.     3.  March  (or  double  quick— 'March). 

801.  The  colunm  will  deploy  on  the  two  leading 
companies,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for 
the  deployment  of  a  close  e(»lunm.  No.  533  and  fol- 
lowing; at  the  c()mmand  inarch,  the  chef  of  the  first 
division  will  halt  it,  and  the  captains  of  the  fourth 
and  fifth  companies  will  align  their  companies  by  the 
right. 

802.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  citlonel  to  deploy  the  column  and  to  continue  to 
march  in  the  order  of'battle,  he  will  n.  t  cause  mark- 
ers to  be  established  at  the  head  of  the  c  lumn.  The 
movement  will  be  executod  by  the  commands  and 
means  indicated  No.  800,  observing  what  follows.  At 
the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fiist  division  will 
C(m)mand,  Quick  time.  At  the  command  march,  the 
first  division  will  continue  to  march  in  quick  time; 
the  colonel  will  command,  Guide  centre.  The  captains 
of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  the  color,  and  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  179 

men,  will  immediately  conform  to  the  principles  of  the 
march  in  line  of  battle.  The  companies  will  take  the 
quick  step  by  the  command  of  their  captains,  as  they 
successively  arrive  in  line.  The  movement  comple- 
ted, the  colonel  may  cause  the  battalion  to  march 
in  double  quick  time. 

To  form  the  double  column  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to 
the  right  or  left. 

803.  The  double  column,  being  at  company  distance 
and  at  a  halt,  may  be  formed  into  line  of  battle  faced 
to  the  right  or  left ;  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
form  it  faced  to  the  right,  he  will  command: 

1.  Right  into  line  wheel,  left  companies  on  the  right 
into  line.  2.  Battalion,  guide  right.  3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

804.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company;  the  right 
companies  uill  be  cautioned  that  they  will  have  to 
wheel  to  the  right  into  line,  the  left  companies  that 
they  will  have  to  march  straight  forward. 

805.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  of  the 
fourth  company  will  place  himself  briskly  on  the  di- 
rection of  the  right  guides  of  the  column,  face  to  them, 
and  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  last  files  of  his  com- 
pany when  in  line  of  battle ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
assure  him  in  that  position. 

806.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
all  the  captains,  the  right  companies  will  form  to  the 


180  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-PART  V. 

right  into  line  of  battle,  the  left  companies  will  put 
themselves  in  march  in  order  to  form  on  the  rii,dit  in- 
to line  of  battle;  these  formations  will  be  executed  by 
the  means  indicated  No.  391  and  following,  No.  416 
and  following ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the 
guides  of  the  left  wing  on  the  line  of  battle  as  tliey 
successively  come  upon  it. 

807.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
commaud : 


1.  Right  into  line  ichccl.  2.  Left  companies,  on  the 
right  into  line.  3.  Battalion  guide  right.  4.  March 
(or  double  (/Mir/c— March). 


808.  At  the  first  command,  each  cajttain  will  place 
himself  promptly  before  tlie  centre  of  his  company ; 
the  right  companies  will  be  cautioned  that  they  will 
have  to  wheel  to  the  right,  and  the  left  companies 
that  they  will  have  to  form  ou  the  right  into  line. 

809.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  rejyeated,  the 
right  C(mipani('s  will  form  to  tlie  right  into  line,  and 
the  left  companies  ou  the  right  into  line.  These 
formations  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  Nos.  402, 
417,  and  following. 

810.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  the  battal- 
ion forward,  at  the  moment  the  right  companies  have 
completed  the  wheel,  he  will  command  : 

5.  Forward.    6.  March  (or  double  quick — MarchJ. 


J 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  181 

811.  At  the  command  forward,  the  captains  of  the 
right  companies  will  command,  Q^uick  time.  At  the 
command  march,  the  riuht  companies  will  cease  to 
wheel  and  march  straight  forward.  The  colonel  will 
then  add: 

7.   Guide  centre. 

812.  The  movement  of  the  left  companies  will  be 
executed  in  double  quick  time  as  prescribed  above, 
and  as  they  arrive  on  the  line  each  captain  will  cause 
his  company  to  march  in  quick  time. 

813.  The  column  may  be  formed  faced  tb  the  left 
into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  principles. 

814.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass  instead  of  at 
company  distance,  these  movements  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  Nos.  417,  502, 
and  510. 

Remark  on  the  deployment  of  the  double  column. 

815.  The  depth  of  the  double  column,  at  company 
distance,  being  inconsiderable,  closing  it  in  mass,  if 
at  a  halt,  in  order  to  deploy  it,  may  be  dispensed 
with  ;  but  if  it  be  in  march,  it  will  be  preferable  to 
cause  it  so  to  close,  in  halting,  before  deploying. 

816.  The  double  column  will  be  deployed  habitual- 
ly on  the  centre  companies,  but  the  colonel  may  some- 
times deploy  it  on  any  interior  company,  or  on  the 
first  or  eighth  company. 


182        school  of  the  battalion— part  v. 

Article  Fourteentil 

Dispositions  against    Cavalry. 

817.  A  battalion  being  in  column  hy  company,  at 
full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  square,  he  will  first 
cause  divisions  to  be  formed  ;  which  being  done,  ho 
will  command  : 

1.    To  form  square.     2.    To  half  distance  close  column. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — Marciij, 

818.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  close 
to  company  distance,  the  second  division,  taking  its 
distance  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  division. 

810.  At  the  moment  of  halting  the  fourth  division, 
the  file  closers  of  each  company  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed, passing  by  the  outer  flank  of  their  companies 
will  place  themselves  tv^'o  paces  before  the  front  rank 
opposite  to  their  respective  places  in  liiie  of  battle, 
and  face  towards  the  head  of  the  column. 

820.  At  the  conunencement  of  the  movement,  the 
major  will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  c<)lumu 
abreast  with  the  first  division  ;  the  buglers  formed 
in  two  ranks  will  place  themselves  at  plattion  distance, 
behind  the  inner  platoons  of  the  second  division. 

821.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
may,  according  to  circumstances,  put  the  column  in 


H y 


Q  a  a  a  a  o    aaoaoD> 


1  H  F 


jPS£. 


-H  H 


,QOaaQD     D     DCTDn. 


=  Fiel 


Frs?- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  183 

march,   or  cause  it  to  form  square ;  if  be  wish  to  do 
the  latter,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Form  square.     2.  Right  and  left  into  line,  irheel. 


822.  At  tiie  first  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel, 
facing  to  the  left  guides,  and  the  major,  iacing  to  those 
of  the  right,  will  align  them,  from  the  front,  an  the 
respective  guides  of  the  i'ourth  division,  who  will 
stand  fast,  holding  up  their  pieces,  inverted,  perpen- 
dicularly ;  the  riglit  guides,  in  placing  themselves  on 
the  direction,  will  take  their  exiict  distances. 

823.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  all  the  captains 
of  the  second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves 
before  the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and 
caution  them  th;it  they  will  have  to  wheel,  the  right 
companies  to  the  fight,  and  the  left  companies  to  the 
left  into  line  of  battle. 

824.  The  color-bearer  will  step  back  into  the  line 
of  file  closers,  opposite  tt>  his  place  in  line  of  brittle, 
and  will  be  replaced  by  the  C(u-poral  of  his  file,  who 
is  in  the  rear  rank,  the  corporal  of  the  same  file  who 
is  in  the  rank  of  file  dosesrs  will  step  into  the  rear 
rank. 

825.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  command : 
1.  Fourth  dicision,  forward ;  2.  Guide  /f/if,  and  place 
himself  at  the  same  tin:ie  two  paces  outside  of  its  left 
flauk. 


184  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

826.  These  dispositions  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

March  (or  double  quick — March). 

827.  At  this  command,  biiskly  repeated,  the  first 
division  will  stand  fast;  bnt  its  riglit  lile  will  face  to 
the  right,  and  its  left  file,  to  the  left. 

828.  The  companies  of  the  second  and  third  divi- 
sions will  wheel  to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  and 
the  buglers  will  advance  a  space  equal  to  the  fnuit  <if 
a  company. 

829.  The  fourth  division  will  close  up  to  form  the 
square,  and  when  it  shall  have  closed,  its  chief  will, 
halt  it,  face  it  al>out,  and  align  it  by  the  rear  rank 
upon  the  guides  of  the  division,  who  will,  for  this  pur- 
pose, remain  faced  to  the  front.  The  junior  captain 
will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  frwit, 
and  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company  will 
place  himself  behind  him  in  the  front  rank,  become 
rear.  The  file  closers  will,  at  the  same  time,  close 
up  a  pace  on  the  front  rank,  and  the  outt'rfile  on  each 
flank  of  the  division  will  face  outwards 

830.  The  square  being  formed,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

G«if/cs— Posts. 

831.  At  this  command,  tlie  chiefs  of  the  first  and 
fourth  divisions,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  enter  the 
square. 

832.  The  captains  whose  companies  have  formed  to 
the  right  into  line,  will  remain  on  the  left  of  their  com- 


SCHOOL  OF  TEIE  BATTALION— PART  V.  185 

]M;iies;  the  left  guide  of  each  of  those  companies 
will,  in  the  rear  rank,  cover  his  captain,  and  the  cov- 
ering sergeant  of  each  will  place  himself  us  a  file 
closer  beliind  the  right  file  of  his  company. 

833.  The  field  and  staff  will  enter  the  square,  the 
lieutenant  colonel  placing  himself  behind  the  left,  and 
the  major  behind  the  right  of  the  first  division. 

834.  If  the  battalion  present  ten,  instead  of  eight 
companies,  the  fourth  division  will  make  the  same 
movements  prescribed  above  for  the  second  and  third 
divisions,  and  the  fifth,  the  movements  pi  escribed  for 
the  fourth  division. 

835.  A  battalion  ought  never  to  present,  near  the 
enemy's  cavalry,  an  odd  company.  The  odd  com- 
pany, under  that  circumstance,  ought,  when  the  bat- 
talion is  under  arms,  to  be  consolidated,  for  the  time, 
with  the  other  companies. 

836.  The  fronts  of  the  square  will  be  designated  as 
follows :  the  first  division  will  always  be  the  Jirst 
front  ;  the  last  division,  the  fourth  front ;  the  right 
companies  of  the  other  divisions  will  form  the  second 
front ;  and  the  left  companies  of  the  same  divisions 

the  third  front. 

837.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  company,  at 
full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  in  march,  when  the 
coh)nel  shall  wish  to  form  square,  he  will  cause  this 
movement  to  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means 
indicated.  No.  817. 

838.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  close 
to  company  distance,  as  is  prescribed.  No.  278.  When 
the  chief  of  the  fourth  division  shall  command  Quick 
inarch,  the  file  closers  of  this  division  will  place  them- 
selves before  the  front  rank. 


]86         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  V. 

839.  The  major  and  the  buglers   will  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  82U. 

840.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Form  square.     2.   Right   and  left  into  line,  icheel. 
3.  March. 


841.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  w^ill  caution  it  to  halt;  all  the  captains  of  the 
second  and  third  divisi(ms  will  nipidly  place  thenj- 
selves  before  the  centres  of  their  respective  compa- 
nies, and  caution  them  that  they  will  have  to  wheel, 
the  right  companies  to  the  right,  and  the  left  compn- 
nies  to  the  lelt  into  line.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  di- 
vision will  caution  it  to  cntinue  its  march,  and  will 
hasten  to  its  left  flank.  At  the  tliird  command,  ])risk- 
ly  repeated,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  halt 
his  divisi(»n  and  align  it  to  the  left,  the  outer  files  will 
face  to  the  right  and  left,  the  rest  of  the  movement 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  S'2S  and  following. 

842.  The  lieutenant  c(»lonel  and  the  major,  at  the 
command  viarch,  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,, 

No.  822. 

843.  If  the  battalion,  before  the  square  is  formed, 
be  in  dou])Ie  colunm,  the  two  heading  companies 
will  forr.i  flu'  first  front,  the  two  rear  cdinpanies 
the  fourth  ;  the  other  companies  of  tin?  right  lialf 
battalion  will  form  the  second,  and  those  of  the  left 
half  battalion  the  third  front. 

844.  The  first  and  fourth  fronts  will  be  command- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION- PART  V.  187 

ed  by  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and    fourth  divisions  ; 
each  of  the  other  two  by  its  senior  captain. 

845.  The  commander  of  each  front  will  place  him- 
self four  paces  behind  its  present  rear  rank,  and  will 
be  replaced  momentarily  in  the  command  of  his 
company  by  the  next  in  rank  therein 

846.  If  the  column  be  at  full  distance,  instead  of 
at  C(ui3pany  distance,  as  has  been  supposed,  the 
square  will  be  formed  in  the  manner  prescribed.  No. 
8J7  or  838,  and  following;  and  the  dispositions  indi- 
cated, Nos.  819  and  820,  will  be  executed  at  the 
command  form  square. 

847.  If  the  column  by  division,  whether  double  or 
simple,  be  in  mass,  and  thecohniel  shill  wish  to  form 
it  into  square,  he  will  first  cause  it  to  take  company 
distance  ;  to  this  etfect,  he  will  command  : 


1.   To  form  square.     2.  By  the  head  of  column,  take 
half  distance. 


848.  The  divisions  will  take  half  distance  by  the 
means  indicated.  No.  324,  and  following.  What  is 
prescribed.  No.  820,  will  be  executed  as  the  first  and 
second  divisions  are  put  in  motion. 

849.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  the  moment 
the  third  division  shall  have  its  distance.  As  soon  as 
the  column  is  halted,  th.'  dispositions  indicated.  No. 
819,  will  be  executed,  and  when  these  are  com- 
pleted, the  colonel  may  proceed  to  form  square. 


183  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

850.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  he  will  also,  in 
the  first  place,  cause  company  distance  to  be  taken, 
and,  for  this  purpose,  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  By  the  head  of  column,  take 
half  distance.  3.  MARCH  (or  double  quick — 
March) 

851.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescrib- 
ed, No.  330,  and  following.  VVhat  is  prescribed.  No. 
820,  will  be  executed  as  the  first  and  second  divi- 
sions are  put  in  motion. 

852.  The  colonel  will  proceed  to  form  square  the 
moment  the  third  division  shall  have  its  distance ; 
at  th'^  command /o?v/i  square,  the  dispositions  indicat- 
ed, No.  819,  will  be  executed.  If  it  be  intended 
merely  to  dispose  the  column  for  square,  the  colonel 
will  not  halt  the  column  until  the  last  division  has 
its  distance. 

853.  In  a  simple  column,  left  in  front,  these  sev- 
eral movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means  ;  but  the  fronts 
of  the  square  will  have  the  same  designations  as  if 
the  right  of  the  column  were  in  front,  that  is,  the 
first  division  will  constitute  the  first  front,  and  thus 
of  the  other  subdivisions. 

854.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  dis- 
tance Iqss  than  thirty  paces,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  (such)  front,  forward.     2.  March. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  189 

H55.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  advance  be  made 
h\  the  first  front,  the  cliief  of  this  front  will  com- 
mand : 

].  First  division,  forward.     2.   Guide  centre. 

^')C}.  The  chief  of  the  second  front  will  face  his 
frdut  to  the  left.  The  captains  of  the  companies  com- 
})nsing  this  front  will  place  themselves  outside,  and 
on  the  right  of  their  left  guides,  who  will  replace 
tlieni  in  the  front  rank;  the  chief  of  the  third  front 
will  face  his  front  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  in 
this  front  will  place  themselves  outside,  and  ou  the 
left  of  their  covering  sergeants:  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
front  will  fiice  his  front  about,  and  command  :  1. 
Fourth  division,  forward.  2.  Guide  centre.  The  cap- 
tain who  is  in  the  centre  of  the  first  front,  will  be 
cliarged  with  the  direction  «if  the  march,  and  will  re- 
dilate  himself  by  the  means  indicated  in  the  school 
v\  the  company.  No.  89. 

^^.")7.  At  the  command  march,  the  square  will  put 
itself  in  motion  ;  the  companies  marching  by  the  flank 
w  ill  be  careful  not  to  lose  their  distances.  The  chief 
of  the  fourth  division  will  cause  his  division  to  keep 
constantly  closed  on  the  flanks  of  the  second  and 
third  fronts, 

853.  This  movement  will  only  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

859.  The  lieutenai.t  coh»nel  will  place  himself  in 
rear  of  the  file  of  direction  in  order  to  regulate  the 
march. 


190  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-PART  V. 

860.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  halt  the  sc^uare, 
he  will  command: 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

801.  At  the  second  c<mimand,  the  square  will 
halt;  the  fourth  front  will  face  about  immediately, 
and  without  further  connuand  ;  the  second  and  third 
fronts  will  face  outwards;  the  captains  t»f  companies 
will  resume  their  places  as  in  square. 

862.  In  moving  the  square  forward  by  the  se- 
cond, third,  or  fourth  frctnts,  the  same  rules  will  be 
observed. 

863.  The  battalion  .being  formed  into  square,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  greater 
distance  than  thirty  paces,  he  will   command: 

1.  Form  column. 

864.  The  chief  of  the  first  front  will  command: 
1.  First  division  foruanl.     2.   Guide  left. 

865.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  cau- 
tion it  to  stand  fast ;  the  commander  of  the  second 
front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  left,  and  then  com- 
mand, By  company,  hy  file  left.  The  commander  of 
the  third  fi-ont  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
then  command,  By  company,  by  file  right.  At  the 
moment  the  second  and  third  fronts  face  to  the  left 
and  right,  each  captain  will  cause  to  break  to  the 
rear  the  two  leading  files  of  his  company. 


JIUJ. 


r{- 

F 

K 

H 

H 

i-, 

H 

H 

h 

^ 

□        L-. 

o.c 

oo 

L- 

T- 

H 

-TT 

1l 

Kie- 


Fi^-2 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  191 

866.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

867.  At  this  command,  the  first  front  will  march 
forward  ;  its  chief  will  halt  it  when  it  shall  have  ad- 
vanced a  space  equal  to  half  its  front,  and  align  it  by 
the  left. 

868.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  second 
and  third  fronts  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  left  and 
right,  and  march  to  meet  each  other  behind  the  cen- 
tre of  the  first  division,  and  the  moment  they  unite, 
the  captain  of  each  company  will  halt  his  ct»mpany 
and  face  it  to  the  front.  The  division  being  re-form- 
ed, its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left. 

869.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  cause 
it  to  fixce  about :  its  file  closers  will  remain  before 
the  front  rank. 

870.  The  column  being  thus  re-formed,  the  colonel 
may  put  it  in  march  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed. No.  164,  and  following ;  the  right  guides  will 
preserve  company  distance  exactly  as  the  directing 
guides. 

87J.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form 
square,  he  will  give  the  commands  indicated,  No. 
840. 

872.  To  cause  the  square  to  march  in  retreat  a 
distance  greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will 
first  cause  column  to  be  formed  as  hidicated  No. 
863;  and  when  formed,  he  will  cause  it  to  face  by 
the  rear  rank  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command: 

1.   To  march  in  retreat.      2.  Face  by  the  rear   rank. 
3.  Battalion,  about— ¥  AC'S. 


192  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

873.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the 
interior  divisions  will  jtliice  themselves,  jmssing  by 
the  outer  flanks  of  their  respective  companies,  be- 
hind the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line  of 
battle;  the  file  closers  of  the  other  divisions  will 
stand  fast. 

874.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
about;  each  chief  of  division  will  place  himself  be- 
fore its  rear  rank,  become  front,  passing  through 
the  interval  between  its  two  companies;  the  guides 
will  step  into  the  rear  rank,  now  frt>nt. 

875.  The  column  being  thus  ilisposed,  the  c(donel 
may  put  it  in  march,  or  cause  it  to  form  square  as  if 
it  were  faced  by  the  front  rank.  The  square  being 
formed, its  fronts  will  preserve  the  same  designations 
they  had  when  faced  by  the  front  rank. 

•  876.  The  battalion  being  in  s»]uare  by  the  rear 
rank,  when  the  c(donel  shall  wish  to  nuirch  it  in  re- 
treat or  in  advance,  a  distance  less  than  thirty  paces, 
he  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  854  and 
following;  otherwise,  he  will  re-f<u-m  the  cdumn 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  8C3  by 
marching  forwaid  the  fourth  front. 

877.  If  the  square  is  to  be  marched  to  the  front  a 
distance  gi-eater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will" 
face  the  colunm  by  the  front  rank ;  to  this  end,  he 
will  command  : 


1.   To    inarch   in   advance.  2.  Face  by  the  front  rank ^ 
3.  Battalion  about — Face. 


»■ 


'  W^W^'":f'^iW£^y?^ 


1 

1 

* 

i             ^. 

i     * 

K^L^'''            1 

1 

i 

i 

Ml 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  193 

878.  Wbicli  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  873 
and  folbtwing. 

879.  If  the  c<»linnii  be  iiiarcbing  in  advance,  and 
the  cftlonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will 
command: 

1.   To  march  in  retreat.     2.  Battalion  right  about . 
3.  M\RCH  (ov  double  quick — March). 

880.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of 
the  second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves 
rapidly  before  the  front  rank  of  their  respective  di- 
visions. At  the  command  march,  the  column  will 
face  about  and  move  olf  to  the  rear;  the  chiefs  of  di- 
visions and  the  guides  will  conform  to  what  is  pre 
scribed  No.  874. 

881.  If  the  column  be  marching  iu  retreat,  and 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  advance,  he 
will  command : 

1.    To  march  iu  advance.     2.  Battalion    right   about. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — Marchj. 

882.  .At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of 
the  second  and  third  divisions  will  place  them.selves 
before  the  rear  rank  of  their  respective  divisions;  at 
the  third,  the  column  will  f  ice  by  the  front  rank. 

To  reduce  the  square. 

883.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  bn-ak  the  square,  will 
command : 

1.   Reduce  square.       2.  March    (oi-    double    quick — 
March). 
j3 


194  SCHOOL  OF  TIIC  BATTALION— PART  V. 

884.  This  movement  will  be  executed  in  the  iiinn- 
ner  iiidieatetl,  No.  Siy^  and  fdllimiiifr;  but  the  file 
closers  of  the  fourth  fi-ont  will  plac*'  themselves  be- 
hind the  rear  rank  the  mitui  nt  it  faces  about;  the 
field  and  staff,  the  color-bearer  and  buglers,  will,  jit 
the  same  time,  return  to  their  places  in  column. 

To  form  square  from  line  of  battle. 

885.  A  battalion  dejiloyed,  may  be  formed  into 
square  in  a  direction  either  parallel  or  per[)endicular 
t^  the  line  of  battle. 

886.  In  the  first  case,  the  colonel  will  cause  the 
battalion  to  break  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the 
right  or  left,  and  then  close  the  column  to  half  dis- 
tance, as  indicated,  No.  817,  and  foUowing. 

887.  In  the  second  case,  he  will  ploy  the  battalion 
into  simple  column  by  division  at  half  distance  in 
rear  of  the  right  or  left  division,  or  into  column 
doubled  on  the  centre. 

888.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  colunm  upon  one  of 
the  llauk  divisions,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Column  at  half  distance  by 
division.  15.  On  the  first  (iw  fourth)  division.  4. 
Battalion  right  for  hft)—¥\CE.  5.  Makch  (or 
dotUile  (juicL — March). 

889.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  N(».  1 19  and  following. 

891).  If  tbe  battalion  be  marchin/  in  line  of  battle, 
and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form    square  in  a  direc- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  195 

tion  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  coin- 
ingnd : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  On  the  first  (or  fourth) 
division,  form  column.  3.  Battalion  by  the  right 
Cor  left)  flank.  4.  MARCH  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

891.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  ploying  a  column  by 
division  at  half  distance,  No.  J 50.  The  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  halt  his  divisiou  at  the  command 
march. 

H9'2.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column,  the 
colonel  will  command: 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Double  column  at  half  dis- 
tance. 3.  Battalion  inwards — Face.  4.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

893.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescrib- 
ed No.  778  and  following. 

894.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into 
double  column  to  form  square,  the  colonel  will  com- 

^  mand : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Form  double  column.  3. 
Battalion  by  the  right  and  left  flanks.  4.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

895.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed No.  788.  The  chief  of  the  leading  division 
will  halt  his  divisiou  at  the  command  march. 


19G  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

Ohsertations  relative   to    the  formation  of  sfjuarcs  iu 
two  ran  lis. 


890.  When  tlio  colonel  shall  judge  it  proper  to  have 
a  reserve,  this  reserve,  in  a  column  of  three  divisions 
will  be  formed  of  the  inner  platoons  of  the  second 
division.  The  second  division  will,  in  this  case  close, 
to  platoon  distance  on  the  first  division.  When  the 
square  is  formed,  the  reserve  platoons  will  ui»»ve 
forward  a  distance  nearly  equal  to  a  platoon  frojit. 

897.  In  re-forn'iing  column,  the  first  division  will 
move  forward  platoon,  instead  of  company  distance. 

898.  If  the  colunu)  he  formed  of  four  divisions,  the 
inner  platoons  of  tlie  third  divisi(ui  will  compose  tlie 
reserve;  then,  in  re-forming  column,  the  first  divi- 
sion will  conform  to  the  general  rule,  ancl  the  ehief 
of  the  third,  as  suon  as  his  di\*ision  is  formed,  will 
close  it  to  ])latoon  distance  on  the  seeond  division. 
The  colonel  may,  if  necessary,  form  tlie  reserve  <  f 
the  entire  third  division.  In  this  case  the  mtivement 
will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner 

899.  If  the  column  be  at  full  distance,  when  it  shall 
close  at  the  (;ouimand  to  form  sfjitare,  to  lialf  dis- 
tance, the  chief  of  the  third  division  will  cause  four 
files  to  break  tt>  the  rear  from  the  right  and  left  of 
his  division ;  the  guides  will  cl(»se  upon  the  outer 
files  romaining  in  line,  and  the  left  guide  will  nuirch 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  file  innnediately  in  front 
of  hiul.  This  division  will  then  close  in  niass  on  the 
second  division;  and  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division 
will  cU)se  to  half  distance  on  the  same  division. 


SCHOOL  OF  TIIK  BATTALION— PART  V.         197 

900.  At  the  command  form  square,  the  chief  of  the 
reserve  division    will    couuuaiid,    1.    Third  division, 

forward.  2.  Guide  centre;  at  tliis  command,  the 
guides  on  the  flanks  will  fall  into  the  line  of  file 
closers.  At  the  command  march,  the  reserve  will 
move  forward  the  distance  of  a  company  front. 
When  halted,  its  chief  will  cause  the  pLatoons  to 
be  doubled,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command: 

1.   On  the  centre  double  platoons.      2.  MARCH. 

901.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
will  place  themselves  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their 
respective  plato(»ns;  the  chief  of  each  outer  platoon 
will  face  his  platoon  towards  the  centre,  and  cause 
to  break  to  the  rear  two  files  from  the  left  or  right. 
At  the  c<>mmand  march,  the  outer  platoons  will 
direct  their  march  so  as  to  double  on  the  centre 
platoon  at  the  distance  of  four  paces;  their  chiefs 
will  align  these  outer  platoons  on  the  centre,  and 
the  files  previously  broken  to  the  rear  will  come  into 
line. 

902.  If  the  column  be  at  half,  instead  of  full  dis- 
tance, the  colonel  before  forming  square  will  order 
the  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  to  move 
forward  their  divisions  as  prescribed  No.  899. 

903.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  at  the  com- 
mand to  form  square,  the  chief  of  the  third  division 
will  bleak  four  files  to  the  rear  IVom  each  of  the 
flanks  as  prescribed  No.  899. 

904.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  coluuin  as  soon  as 
the  second  division  shall  have  gained  its  distance. 


198  SCirX  L  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

905.  If  the  colonel  sliall  wish  the  colniun  to  con- 
tinue marching  at  the  command,  hy  the  head  of 
column  take  half  {liatance,  the  chief  (»f  the  reserve 
division  will  give  his  cautionary  commands  in  suffi- 
cient time  to  place  his  division  in  motion  simulta- 
neously with  the  one  which  precedes  it.  The  chief 
of  the  fourth  division  will  ^ive  the  command  march 
at  the  instant  there  is  company  distance  between  his 
division  and  the  second. 


906.  When  the  C(»lonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  the 
column,  at  the  conmiand/orm  columv,  the  chief  of 
the  third  division  will  command,  Form  dirision  ;  at 
this  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  outer  platoons  which 
have  doubled  in  rear  of  the  centre  ])latoons,  will  give 
the  commands  and  make  the  preparatory  movements 
for  deploying  on  the  centre  platoons,  which  will 
be  executed  at  the  command  march  given  by  the 
colonel  and  briskly  repeated  by  the  chief  of  this  di- 
vision. The  division  being  re-formed,  the  cliiefs  of 
the  outer  platoons  will  retake  their  places  in  column, 
and  the  chief  of  this  division  will  again  cause  four 
tiles  from  each  of  its  flanks  to  break  to  the  rear. 


907.  If  before  the  formation  of  the  square,  the 
column  had  been  left  in  front,  it  would  be  lormed  by 
the  same  comnuinds  and  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. Tlie  second  division,  in  this  case,  would 
form  the  reserve. 

908.  The  column  being  formed,  if  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  nuirch  it  in  retreat  he  will  face  it 
by  the  rear  rank  The  files  of  the  third  division 
broken   off  to  the   rear,  will  face   about   with  the 


sen  '<'L  OV  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  19D 

biittalioii,  iind  when  the  column  is  put  in  motion 
will  march  in  front  of  the  rear  rank.  But  should  the 
colonel  wish  to  re-form  the  square,  he  will  cause  the 
battalion  to  face  by  the  front  rank. 

9!t9.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line,  instead  of  in  col- 
umn, the  chief  (»f  the  reserve  division  will  bring 
it  into  column  in  such  manner  that  there  may  be  a 
distance  of  only  four  paces  between  this  division  and 
the  one  which  is  to  be  immediately  in  front  of  it ; 
and  when  this  division  is  halted  and  aligned,  its 
chief  will  cause  the  usual  number  of  files  to  be  broken 
to  the  rear.  The  chief  of  the  division  which  should 
occupy  in  column  a  position  immediately  in  rear  of 
the  reserve  division  ^vill,  on  entering  the  column, 
take  a  distance  of  twelve  paces  between  it  and  the 
.division  establislied  immediately  in  front  of  the  re- 
serve division. 


Squares  in  four  raji/is. 

910.  If  the  square  formed  in  two  ranks,  according 
to  the  preceding  rules,  should  not  be  deemed  suffi- 
ciently strong,  the  colonel  may  cause  the  s<[uare  to 
be  formed  in  four  ranks. 

911.  The  battalion  being  in  column  by  company  at 
full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square  in  four  ranks,  he 
will  first  cause  divisicuis  to  be  formed,  which  being 
executed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks.  2.  To  half  dis 
tance,  close  column.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 


200         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

912.  At  the  first  coimniuul,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  the  riglit  coiiij)iuiy  to  jnce  to 
the  left,  and  the  left  company  to  lace  to  the  rijjht. 
The  chiefs  of  the  (ttlier  divisions  will  caution  tlieir 
divisions  to  move  forward. 

913.  At  the  Ciuiiniand  mdrch,  the  riyht  company  of 
the  first  division  will  form  into  lour  ranks  on  its  left 
file,  and  the  left  ctmpany  into  four  ranks  on  its  right 
file.  The  foruiati(Mi  <'nded,  the  cliief  of  this  division 
will  align  it  by  the  left. 

914.  The  other  divisions  will  move  forward  and 
double  their  files,  marching;  the  right  company  of 
each  division  will  double  on  its  left  file,  and  the  left 
company  on  its  right  file.  The  formation  completed, 
each  chief  of  division  will  connnand,  Guide  left. 
Each  chiel  will  halt  his  division  when  it  shall  have, 
the  distance  of  a  company  fnmt  in  four  ranks  from 
the  preceding  one,  counting  from  its  rear  rank,  and 
will  align  his  division  by  the  left.  At  the  instant  the 
fourth  division  is  halted,  the  file  closers  will  move  ra- 
pidly before  its  front  rank. 

915.  The  cohmel  will  form  square,  re-form  column, 
and  reduce  square  in  fiuir  ranks,  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means  as  prescribed  fitr  a  battalion  in  two 
ranks. 

910.  If  the  square  foinu'd  in  four  ranks  be  reduc- 
ed and  at  a  halt,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
the  battalion  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command: 

1.   In   tiro   raiihs,    untlunhlc   Jilcs.      2.  Battalion  out- 
irards—VACE..      3.  Makch. 

917.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  step 
before  the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and 


I 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.    201 

those  on  their  right  will  Cciution  them  to  face  to  the 
right,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  to  the  left. 

91S.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
face  to  the  right  and  left.       " 

91'),  At  the  command  march,  each  company  will 
undonble  its  files  and  reform  into  two  ranks  as  indi- 
cated in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  37»)  and  fol- 
lowing. Each  captain  will  halt  his  company  and  face 
it  to  the  front.  The  foruuition  completed,  each  chief 
of  division  will  align  his  division  by  the  left. 

920.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  with  divisions 
formed  in  four  ranks,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re- 
form them  into  two  ranks,  he  will  Cfunmand: 

J.   Guide  centre.     2.   In  ticn  ranks,  iindouhle  files.     3 
March. 

921.  The  Ciiptain,  placed  in  the  centre  of  each  di- 
vision, will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front, 
as  will  also  the  left  file  of  the  right  company,  and  the 
right  file  of  the  left  conipany.  Each  company  will 
then  be  re-formed  into  two  ranks,  as  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  company. 

92"2.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  two  ranks, 
the  colonel  will  command,  Guide  left  (or  right.) 

92:1  To  form  square  in  four  ranks  on  (uie  of  the 
flunk  divisions,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Column  at  half 
distance,  by  division.  3.  On  the  first  (or  fourth) 
division.  4.  Battalion,  right  [or  /e/f] — Facr.  5^ 
March  (or  double   quick— March). 


20-2         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V, 

924.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division 
will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  division, 
and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  riyht. 


925.  At  the  fourth  conmiand,  the  right  guide  of  the 
first  division  will  remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  bat- 
talion will  face  to  the  right. 

920.  At  the  command  mnrch,  the  first  file  (»f  four 
men  of  the  first  division  \\\\\  face  to  tlio  front  remain- 
ing doubled.  All  the  otlier  files  of  four  nu^n  will 
step  off  together,  and  each  in  successimi  will  close  up 
to  its  proper  distance  on  the  file  ])n'f'e<ling  it,  and 
face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  Wlicn  tlio  last 
file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will  com- 
mand, l.efi — Dress. 

927.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column  in 
the  same  manner  as  with  a  battalion  in  two  ranks, 
observing  what  follows:  the  chiefs  of  division,  in- 
stead of  allowing  their  divisions  to  file  past  tliem  on 
entering  the  column,  will  contiiuie  to  lead  them,  and 
as  each  division  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with  the  right 
guide  of  the  first  division,  its  chief  will  halt  the  rijzht 
guide,  who  will  iunnediately  face  to  the  frcuit ;  the  first 
file  of  four  men  will  also  halt  at  the  sauu?  time  and 
face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The  second  file 
will  close  (»n  the  first,  and  when  closed,  halt,  and  face 
to  rhc  fi-i.nt,  remaining  doubled.  All  the  otln-r  files 
will  execute  successively  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed fi)r  the  second.  When  the  last  file  shall 
have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will  couunand, 
Le/i    Dress. 


SCHOOL  I  F  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  203 

928.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks,  2.  On  the  first  di- 
vision, form  column.  3.  Battalion,  by  the  right 
flank.     4.  March  [or  double  quick— Marcu.'\ 

929.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  divi- 
si(m  will  step  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division 
and  cantion  it  to  face  by  the  right  flank.  The  chief 
of  the  first  division  will  caution  his  covering  sergeant 
to  halt,  and  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

930.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right;  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  first  divi- 
sion will  halt  and  remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  first 
division  will  then  form  into  four  ranks  as  heretofore 
prescribed.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column 
in  the  same  manner  as  if  the  movement  had  taken 
place  from  a  halt. 

931.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  a  perpen- 
dicular square  in  four  ranks,  by  double  column,  he 
will  command: 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Double  column, 
at  half  distance.  3.  Battalion  innards — FACE.  4. 
March  [or  double  quick— ^Iarch^. 

933.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  com- 
panies will  place  themselves  before  the  centres  of 
their  respective  companies,  and  caution  those  on  the 
right  to  face  to  the  left,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face 
to  the  right.  Tlie  captain  of  the  fifth  company  will 
caution  his  covering  sergeant  to  stand  fast. 


204         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

933.  At  the  tliird  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  left  and  right;  at  the  comniand  viarch,  the  left 
file  of  the  fonrth,  and  the  right  file  of  the  fifth  com- 
pany, will  face  to  the  front,  remaining  donbled.  The 
fourth  company  will  close  successively  by  file  of  fours 
on  the  left  file,  and  the  fifth  company,  in  like  manner, 
on  the  right  file;  the  files  will  face  to  the  front,  re- 
maining doubled.  The  formation  completed,  the  chief 
of  division  will  command.  Right  dress.  The  junior 
captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between 
the  two  companies. 


934.  The  other  companies  will  close  as  prescribed' 
for  the  double  column  in  two  ranks,  observing  what 
follows:  each  captain  will  halt  the  leading  guide  of 
his  company  the  moment  the  head  of  his  company  ar- 
rives on  a  line  with  the  centre  of  the  ccdumn.  In  the 
right  companies,  the  left  guides  will  step  into  the  line 
of  file  closers,  and  the  left  file  of  four  nu'u  will  face 
immediately  to  rhe  front,  remaining  doubled,  and  by 
the  side  of  the  right  guide  of  the  left  company.  The 
companies  will  each  form  into  four  ranks,  as  pre- 
scribed No.  92(5,  the  right  c<mi])anies  on  the  left  file, 
and  the  left  companies  on  the  right  file.  The  forma- 
tion com]>leted,  the  junior  captain  will  jjjace  himself 
betvs'een  the  two  companies,  and  the  senior  will  com- 
mand, Right  dvess. 


935.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command : 


205 


double 
'Jan/is. 


1  place 
?  com- 
lem  to 
ice  by 
npany 
Qd  re- 
el fifth 
to  the 
1  com- 
move- 
n  was 


en  the 
e  will 


t  colo- 
iou  in 
before 
le  left, 
,  face 
rly  to 


-^v.^.r^^==?==;>^ 


SCH   OL  OF  THE  BATTALU 'N— PAIJT  V. 


1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2  Form  double 
column.  3.  Battalion  by  the  right  and  left  flanks. 
4.  March  (or  double  quick — Mauch). 

936.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  before  the  centres  of  their  respective  com- 
panies, and  those  on  the  rig:ht  will  caution  them  to 
lace  by  the  left  flank,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  by 
the  right  flank ;  the  captain  of  the  fifth  company 
will  caution  his  covering  sergeant  to  halt,  and  re- 
main faced  to  the  front. 

937.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies  will  halt.  The  battalion  Avill  face  to  the 
left  and  right;  the  covering  sei-geant  of  the  fifth  com- 
pany will  halt  and  renij'.in  faced  to  the  front,  the  move- 
ment will  then  be  executed  as  if  the  battalion  was 
at  a  halt. 

Oblique  squares. 

938.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the  oblique  square,  he  will 
command : 

1.    To  form  oblique   square.     2.   On  the  first  division 
form  column. 

939.  At  the  second  conunand,  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel will  trace  the  alignment  of  the  first  division  in 
the  following  manner :  he  will  place  hiujself  before 
and  near  the  right  file  of  this  division,  face  to  the  left, 
march  twelve  paces  along  the  front  rank,  halt,  face 
to  the  right;  march  twelve  paces  perpendicularly  to 


206  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-PART  V. 

the  front,  halt  agii in,  face  to  the  right,  and  immedi- 
ately phice  a  marker  at  this  puint.  The  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  right  comi)any  will  step,  at  the  name 
time,  before  its  right  tile,  face  to  the  left,  and  conform 
the  line  of  his  shoulders  to  that  of  the  shoulders  of  the 
marker  established  by  the  lieutenant  cohmel.  These 
two  markers  being  established,  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel will  place  a  third  marker  on  the  same  alignment, 
at  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  division   w  ill  halt. 

940.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  place  themselves  in 
front  of  the  centres  of  their  divisions  ;  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  immediately  establish  it  by  a  wheel 
to  the  right  (tn  a  fixed  pivot,  against  the  nuirkers> 
and  align  it  by  the  left.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  divi- 
sions will  caution  them  to  face  to  the  right.  The  colo- 
nel will  then  command : 


3.  Battalion    right— Vace.      4.    March    (or  double 
quick — Mauch.) 


941.  The  three  rear  divisicms  will  direct  their 
march  so  as  to  place  themselves  at  half  distance  from 
each  other,  and  in  the  rear  of  tht;  first  division,  as 
previously  indicated,  observing  what  foUows  : 

942.  The  chief  of  the  second  divisicm,  instead  of 
breaking  the  headmost  files  to  the  rear,  will  break 
them  to  the  front,  and  at  the  command  march,  will 
conducthis  division  towanls  the  point  of  entrance  into 
the  column.  Arrived  at  this  point,  he  will  halt  in  his 
own  person,  cause  his  division  to  wheel  by  file  to  the 


^v 


^A^ 


fTTTTe¥'«To  ? 


•aflff>esa0SBS 


■         ^ 

r  ^ 

m. 

fL,,        -        -i         ■  .        ."^^ 

^f%    . 

■ 

^> 

iL__^^I_ !  ■ 

■ 

1 1 JLJ.  f  l-iJB_Ll.UL. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION -PART  V.     207 

right,  instructing  the  right  guide  to  direct  himself 
parallelly  to  the  first  division ;  and  as  so<tn  as  the  left 
file  has  passed,  its  chief  will  halt  the  division,  and 
align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  divisions  will  break  to 
the  rear,  but  slighily;  each  will  enter  the  column  as 
prescribed  for  the  second,  and  the  moment  the  bat- 
talion is  ployed  into  column,  the  colonel  will  cause 
it  to  form  square. 

943.  The  formation  of  a  battalion  into  oblique 
square  on  the  left  division,  will  be  executed  iiccord- 
ing  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

944.  Should  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel 
will  first  cause  it  to  halt. 

945.  In  the  preceding  example,  the  battalion  was 
supposed  to  be  deploye.i  ;  but  if  it  be  already  formed 
in  column,  the  desired  obliquity  will  be  established 
by  causing  it  to  change  direction  by  the  flank  ;  to 
this  end,  the  colonel  will  command: 


1.    To  form   oblique  square.     2.   Change  direction  by 
the  right  (or  left)  flank. 

946.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  trace  the  new  direction  in  the  following  manner; 
he  will  place  before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  head- 
most division,  two  markers,  and  a  third  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  first  two,  on  the  side  of  the  change  of 
direction,  and  at  twelve  paces  from  the  flank  of  the 
column.  He  will  then  place  himself  before  the  third 
marker,  march  twelve  paces  perpendicularly   to  the 


2  S  HCIIOOL  nr  THE  llATTALIUN— PART  V. 

front,  h.ilt,  ;nul  rini-;h  trjicing  the  now  (lirecti<ni  in  tlic 
maniu'r  iiivlicutcd,  No.  9;}!). 

947.  The  C('I:)ii<'l  will  theji  coinniaiiJ  : 

2.  Battalion  right  (ov  left) — Face.      4.  March  (or 
double  quick — MaRCII). 

948.  The  change  of  direction  having  been  executed, 
the  colonel  will  cause  the  square  to  be  formed. 

949.  Should  the  column  b(;  in  n^arcb,  the  cnlunel 
will  first  cause  it  to  halt. 

950.  Oblique  s(iuares  in  four  ranlvs,  will  lie  execu- 
ted by  the  same  means,  and  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  the  formation  of  squares  in  four 
ranks. 

955.  Whether  the  Itattalion  be  ployed  into  simple 
or  doulile  (v-liiiu!!,  the  particular  dispositions  for  the 
formation  of  the  scpuire  will  be  executed  as  pre 
scribed  No.  «l9aiid  following.  The  division  which  is 
to  form  the  reai*  of  the  column,  will  be  closed  in  mass, 
and  as  soon  as  it  is  aligned,  the  major  will  rectify  the 
position  of  the  guides  on  the  side  of  the  column  op- 
posite to  tlic  direction. 

952.  If  it  be  f  he  wisli  of  the  colonel  merely  to  pre 
pare  for  s<piare,  he  will  in  all  formations  with  that 
view  substitute  the  comma  ml  prepare  for  square  in 
place  of /o /or///  sr/Hr/rr,  and  in  that  case,  the  last  di- 
vision will  enter  the  colunui  atcomi)any  distance. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  of  squares. 

953    It  is  H  general  principle  that  a  ccdumu  by  com- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  209 

pauy,  whicft  is  to  be  formed  into  sqiuare,  will  first 
form  divisions,  and  close  to  half  distance.  Neverthe- 
less, if  it  find  itself  suddenly  threatened  by  cavalry 
without  sufficient  time  to  form  divisions,  the  colonel 
will  cause  the  column  to  ck^se  to  platoon  distance  and 
then  form  square  by  the  commands  and  means  which 
have  been  indicated  ;  the  leading  and  rearmost  com- 
panies will  conform  themselves  to  ^^  hat  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  divisions  in  those  positions.  The  other 
companies  will  form  by  platoon  to  the  right  and  left 
into  line  of  battle,  and  each  chief  of  platoon,  after 
having  hiilted  it,  will  place  himself  on  the  line,  as  if 
the  platoon  were  a  company,  and  he  will  be  covered 
by  the  guide  in  the  rear  rank. 

954.  A  battalion  in  column  at  full  distance,  having 
to  form  square,  will  always  close'on  the  leading  sub- 
division; and  a  column  closed  in  mass,  will  always, 
for  the  same  purpose,  take  distances  by  the  head. 
In  either  case,  the  second  subdivision  should  be  care- 
ful, in  taking  its  distance,  to  reckon  from  the  rear 
rank  of  the  subdivision  in  front  of  it. 

955.  If  a  column  by  company  should  be  required 
to  form  square  in  four  ranks,  the  doubling  of  files  will 
always  take  place  ou  the  file  next  the  guide. 

956.  When  a  column,  disposed  to  form  square,  shall 
be  in  march,  it  will  change  direction  as  a  column  at 
half  distance  ;  thus,  having  to  execute  this  movement, 
the  column  will  take  the  guide  on  the  side  oppfisit© 
to  that  to  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made,, 
if  that  be  not  already  the  side  of  the  guide. 

957.  A  column  doubled  ou  the  centre  at  company 


510  SCH  )   L  OF  THE  BATTALI   N— PART  V. 

distance  or  closed  in  mass,  may  be  formed  into  square 
according  to  the  same  principles  as  a  simple  coliiniu. 
-^58.  When  a  battalion  is  ployed,  with  a  view  to  the 
square, 'it  will  always  be  in  rear  of  the    right  or  left 
.  division,  in  order  that  it   ^lay  i>e  able  to   commence 
'firing,  pending  the  execution  of  the  movement.     The 
double  column,  also,  aifords  this  advantnge,  and  being 
more  promptly  formed  than  any  other,  it  will  habitu- 
ally be   emphtyed,    unless   particular  circumstances 
cause  a  diti'ereut-formatioa  to  be  preferred. 

959.  A  battalion,  in  square,  will  never  use  any  other 
than  the  fire  by  file  and  by  rank;  the  c<dor  being  iu 
the  line  of  file  closers,  its  guard  will  n(»t  fall  back  as 
prescribed  No.  41  ;  it  will  fire  like  the  ■'meu  of  t^o 
company  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

960.  If  the  square  be  formed  in  four  ranks,  tlie 
,  first  two  ranks  will  alone  execute  the  firings  pre- 
'  ^cjibed  above  ;  the  other  two  ranks  will  remaiu  either 

at  shoulder  or  support  arms. 

.,9,GI.  The  formation  of  the  square  being  often  ne- 
.Cj^ssary  in  war,  and  being  the  most  complicated  of  the 
xriaii^oeuvres,  it  will  be  as  frequently  repeated  as  the 
i.!sjupposed  necessity  may  require,  in  order  to  render 
litis  i}i.ec)^ir^usm  familiar  to  both  officers  and  men. 

lt>02.  ;In  fh.e  execution  of  this  manosuvre,  the  colu- 

<  \Y{iU  Cf^VJfvfuIly  observe  that  the  divers  movements 

■'HI  iitiiii,v({'lY.^s  succetjd  each  other  without  loss  of 

^\  Si(f;j/|l^p\y{ithout  confusion ;  for,  if  the  rapidity 

y^         ,         "^  iWRV^FTJ^'^'ts  requires  the  greatest  prompti- 

f  ^pHVulv  ^WJfV^i'^*'-  <'^'  squares,  so,  on   the  other 

?  Ae  in  the        ^ w"  alwf^ys  results  in  disorder,  and  in 

wnu\  pvecipit^.       V^lSBo^j^^r  *<tore  to  be  avoided. 

no  circumstance  - 


s 

1 

m 

« 

m 

n 
m 

H 

■   - 

"■•••. 

P. 

^:^^.°°  ^    '°>j^..". 

□ 

D 

BF?^^^                     ___, 

1"   '°  '  Hi 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  211 

963.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cover  by 
skirmishers  the  movements  of  a  column  preparing  to 
form  square,  he  will  detach  for  this  purpose  one  or 
two  inner  platoons  of  one  of  the  interior  divisions  of 
the  column.  In  this  case,  the  exterior  platoons  of 
this  division  and  the  following  subdivisions,  will,  ac- 
cording to  circumstances,  close  on  the  preceding  sub- 
division, in  such  manner,  that  there  may  be  between 
them  only  the  distance  necessary  for  forming  into 
line. 

964.  When  the  colonel  shall  be  ready  to  form 
square,  he  will,  in  order  to  recall  the  skirmishers, 
cause  to  the  color  to  be  sounded.  If  on  the  return 
of  the  skirmishers,  there  be  not  room  for  them  to 
form  into  line  of  battle,  they  will  double  on  the  outer 
platoons  of  their  respective  companies. 

Column  against  cavalry. 

965.  When  a  column  closed  in  mass  has  to  form 
square,  it  will  begin  by  taking  company  distance; 
but  if  so  sud  euly  threatened  by  cavalry  as  not  to 
allow  time  for  this  disposition,  it  will  be  formed  in 
the  following  manner : 

966.  The  colonel  will  command; 

].  Column  against  cavalry.     2.  MARCH. 

967.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast  and  pass  behind 
the  rrar  rank ;  in  the  interior  divisions  each  cap- 
tain will  promply  designate  the  number  of  files  ne- 


212     SCHOaL  '-F  THE  KATTALI  N— PART  V. 

cessary  to  close  tbo  interval  between  bii>i  company  and 
tbe  one  in  front  of  it.  Tbe  captains  of  the  divisions 
next  to  the  one  in  rear,  in  addition  to  cbysing  the 
interval  in  front,  will  also  close  up  tbe  interval  which 
separates  this  division  fi-oni  tbe  last ;  the  chief  of  the 
fourth  division  will  caution  it  to  face  about,  and  its 
file  closers  will  pass  briskly  before  tbe  front  rank. 

968.  At  tbe  command,  march,  the  guides  of  each 
division  will  place  themselves  rapidly  in  tbe  line  of 
tile  closers.  Tbe  first  division  will  stand  fast,  tbe 
fourth  will  face  about,  tbe  outer  file  of  each  ot  these 
divisions  will  then  fiice  outwards  ;  in  tbe  other  divi- 
sions the  files  designated  tor  cU)sing  the  intervals  will 
form  to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  but  in  tbe  divi- 
sion next  to  the  rearmost  one,  tbe  first  files  that 
come  into  line  will  close  to  tbe  right  or  lelt  until 
they  join  the  rear  division.  Tbe  files  of  each  com- 
pany w^hich  remain  in  column  will  close  on  their  outer 
files,  formed  into  line,  in  order  to  create  a  vacant 
spiice  in  tbe  middle  of  the  column. 

900.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  co/wH/n  against 
cavalry  will  be  formed  by  the  same  commands  and 
means.  At  the  command  march,  tbe  first  and  fourth 
divisions  will  bait  and  the  latter  division  will  face 
about;  tbe  interior  divisions  will  conform  to  what 
has  been  pi'escribed  above. 

970.  Tbe  battalion  being  no  longer  threatened  by 
cavalry,  tbe  colonel  will  conunand  : 

1.  Form  column.    2,  March. 

971.  At  the  command  march,  th«;  files  in  column 
will  close  to  the  left  and  right  to  make  loom  for  those 


SCH  »   L  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V.  213 

in  line  who  will  retake  their  places  in  column  by 
stepping  backwards,  except  those  closing  the  interval 
between  the  two  rear  divisions,  who  will  take  their 
places  in  column  by  a  flank  movement.  The  fourth 
division  will  face  about,  the  guides  will  resume  their 
places. 

972.  If  the  colonel  should  be  so  pressed  as  not  to 
have  time  to  order  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  the  men 
will  fix  them,  without  command  or  signal,  at  the 
cautionary  command,  column  against  cavalry. 

973.  As  this  manoeuvre  is  often  used  in  war,  and 
with  decided  advantage,  the  colonel  will  frequently 
cause  it  to  le  executed  in  order  to  render  it  familiar. 

Article  Fifteenth. 

■The  Rally. 

974.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  the  col- 
onel will  sometimes  cause  the  disperse  to  be  sounded, 
at  which  signal,  the  battalion  will  break  and  dis- 
perse. 

975.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  bat- 
talion, he  will  cause  to  the  color  to  be  sounded,  and 
at  the  same  time  place  two  markers  and  the  color- 
bearer  iu  the  direction  he  may  wish  to  give  the  bat- 
talion. 

976.  Each  captain  will  rally  his  company  about 
six  paces  in  rear  of  the  place  it  is  to  occupy  in 
line  of  battle. 

977.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  color-company  to 
be  promptly    established  against    the  markers,  and 


214  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 

each  company  by  the  command  of  its  captnin  will 
be  aligned  on  the  color-compnny  according  to  the 
principles  heretofore  prescribed. 

978.  When  the  colonel  shiill  wish  to  rally  the  bat- 
talion in  column,  he  will  cause  the  assembly  to  be 
sounded,  and  place  two  markers  before  the  position 
to  be  occupied  by  the  first  company  ;  the  captain  of 
this  company  will  rally  his  cimipany  in  rear  of  the 
two  markers,  and  each  of  the  other  captains  will 
rally  his  company  at  platoon  distance,  behind  the 
one  which  should  precede  it  in  the  order  in  column. 

Article  Sixteenth. 

Rules  for  manauvring  by  the  rear  rank. 

979.  It  may  often  be  necessary  to  cause  a  battal- 
ion to  manoeuvre  by  the  rear  rank;  when  the  case 
presents  itself,  the  following  rules  will  be  observed. 

980.  The  battalion  being  by  the  front  rank,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  manoeuvre  by  the  rear  rank, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.      2.  Battalion.      3.   About 
— Face. 

981.  If  the  battalion  be  deployed,  this  movement 
will  be  executed  as  has  been  indicated  for  the  fire  by 
the  rear  rank. 

982.  If  the  battalion  be  in  column  by  company,  or 
by  platoon,  right  or  left  in  front,  the  chiefs  of  subdi- 
vision, to  take  their  new  places  in  column,  will  each 


gCMOOL  OP  THE  BArrALlON^PAUT  V.  215 

pass  by  the  left  flank  of  his  subdivision,  and  the  file 
closers  by  the  right  flank ;  the  guides  will  place 
themselves  in  the  rear  rank, 

933.  If  the  column  be  formed  by  division,  the 
chiefs  of  divisi(m  will  each  pass  by  the  interval  in 
the  centre  of  his  division,  and  the  file  closers  by  the 
outer  flanks  of  their  respective  companies  ;  the  junior 
captain  in  each  division  will  step  into  the  rear  rank, 
and  be  covered  in  the  front  rank  by  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company. 

984.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself 
abreast  with  the  leading  subdivision,  and  the  major 
abreast  with  the  rearmost  one. 

985.  The  battalion  being  faced  by  the  rear  rank, 
companies,  divisions,  and  wings,  will  preserve  their 
prior  denominations  respectively. 

986.  The  manoeuvres  by  the  rear  rank  will  be  ex- 
ecuted by  the  s;inie  commands  and  «in  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  if  the  battalion  faced  by  the  front  rank ;  but 
in  such  manner  that  when  the  battalion  shall  be 
brought  to  its  proper  front,  all  the  subdivisions  may 
find  themselves  in  their  regular  order  from  right  to 
left. 

987.  According  to  this  principle,  when  a  column 
faced  by  the  rear  rank  is  deployed,  the  subdivisions 
which,  in  line  of  battle  by  the  front  rank,  ought  to 
find  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  subdivision  on 
which  the  deployment  is  made,  will  face  to  the  left; 
and  ihose  which  ought  to  be  placed  on  its  left,  will 
face  to  the  right. 

988.  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  faced  by 
the  rear  rank,  is  to  be  ployed  into  column,  the  col- 
onel will  announce,  in  tlie  commands,  left  or  right  in 
front,  according^as  it  may  be  intended  that  the  first 


•216  SBHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION- PART  V. 

or  last  subdivision  shall  be  at  the  head  of  thecolunni, 
because  the  first  subdivision  is  on  the  left,  and  the 
last  on  the  riyht  of  the  battalion  faced  by  the  rear 
rank.  The  column  by  the  rear  rank  will  take  the 
guide  to  tlie  right,  if  the  first  subdivision  be  in  front, 
and  to  the  left  in  the  reverse  case. 

989.  A  column,  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  will  bo 
brought  to  its  proper  front  by  the  means  heretofore 
prescribed.  If  the  column  be  formed  by  company, 
or  by  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  subdivision,  in  order  to 
take  their  new  places  in  column,  will  pass  by  the 
left  of  subdivisions,  now  right,  and  the  file  closers  by 
the  right,  now  left. 


SCHOOL    OF     THE     BATTALION, 


ARRANGED      INTO      LESSONS. 


Lesson    First. 

Article  I.  -  Open  ranks,  No.  23. 

Article  II. — Close  ranks,  No.  29. 

Article  III — Manual  of  arms,  No.  30.     Loading  at 

will,  No.  31. 
Article  IV. — Different  fires,  by  the  front  rank,  No. 

39,  and  by  the  rear  rank,  No.  54. 


Lesson  Second. 

Article  I. — Break  by  company  to  the  right.  No.  69  or 
to  the  left,  No.  74. 

Article  II. — March  in  column  at  the  cadenced  step, 
a  considerable  distance.  No.  164.  Change  of  di- 
rection. No.  231.  Diminish  and  increase  front  in 
marching,  No.  196.     March  in  retreat,  No.  170. 


218  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Article  III. — Halt  the  column,  No.  239.  Form  it 
to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle,  No.  390. 
Execute  this  formation,  the  column  marching,  No. 
402. 

Article  /F.— Execute  the  countermarch,  and  repeat 
the  same  movements,  No.  351. 

Article  F.— Form  column  into  line  of  battle,  to  the 
right  or  left,  by  inversion.  No.  407. 

Lesson  Third. 

Article  I. — Break  by  company  to  the  rear  by  the 
right  or  left,  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt,  No.  87, 
or  marching,  No,  94. 

Article  II. — March  in  the  route  step,  No.  198.  Cause 
to  be  executed,  at  this  gait  and  in  double  quick 
time,  the  divers  movements  incident  to  the  column  ■ 
in   route,  and  cause  the  cadenced   step  to  be  re- 
sumed. 

Article  HI. — Form  the  column  forward  into  line  of 
battle,  Nos.  440,  452,  faced  to  the  rear  into  line  of 
battle,  Nos.  460,  480,  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt, 
or  marching.  Ftirm  the  column  forward  into  line, 
and  continue  the  inarch  in  this  order,  No.  450. 

Article  IV. — Form  the  column  on  the  right.  No.  416, 
or  the  left,  No.  432,  into  line  of  battle. 

Article  V. — March  by  tlie  flank,  No.  722,  and  form 
conjpanies  into  line,  marching. 

Article  VI. — The  column  supposed  to  arrive  before, 
No.  175,  or  behind  the  line  of  battle,  No.  184,  to 
prolong  it  on  that  line, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  219 

Article  VII. — Change  front  forward,  No.  743,  or  in 
rear,  No.  760,  on  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  in 
directions  perpendicular  or  (ibllque. 

Article  r///.— March  by  the  right  flank,  No.  722,  or 
by  the  left  flank,  N<t.  725.  Change  direction  by  file. 
No.  730.  Form  the  battali<m  into  line  of  battle, 
on  the  right  or  left,  by  file,  No.  735. 

Article  IK. — 'Pass  the  defile  in  retreat  by  the  right, 
No.  709,  or  by  the  left  flank,  No.  720. 

Lesson  Fourth. 

Article  I. — Break  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the  right 
or  left,  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt  or  marching, 
No.  102. 

Article  11. — March  in  column  by  division,  No.  161. 
Diminish  and  increase  front  by  company,  No.  196. 

Article  HI. — Close  the  column  to  half  distance  on  the 
headmost  or  the  rearmost  division,  No.  27d. 

Article  IV. — March  in  column  at  half  distance,  No. 
281,  and  change  direction,  No.  287. 

Article  V. — The  column  being  at  half  distance,  to 
form  square  at  a  halt,  No.  8J7,  or  marching,  No. 
837. 

Article  VI. — The  battalion  being  in  square  to  march 
to  the  front.  No.  854.  Halt  the  square,  No.  860. 
Form  column  to  march  to  the  front,  No.  863,  or  in 
retreat,  JS'o.  872.     Ee-form  the  square,  No.  875. 

Article  VII. — Reduce  the  square.  No.  883. 


220  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Article  VIII. — Close  the  column  in  mass  on  the  head- 
most or  rearmost  division,  No.  279. 

Article  IX. — March  in  column  closed  in  mass,  and 
change  direction  by  the  front  of  subdivisions.  No\ 

288. 

Article  X. — Form  the  column  against  cavalry,  No. 
9G6. 

Article  XL — Take  distances  by  the  head,  No.  323  and 
33(>,  or  on  rear  of  the  column,  No.  333,  the  column 
being  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

Article  XII. — The  column  being  by  company,  cause 
to  be  executed  the  movements  indicated  in  Nos  3, 
4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  10  and  11  of  this  lesson.  The  column 
being  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  to  form  to 
the  left  or  right,  into  line,  wheel,  on  the  rear  of  the 
column,  No.  502. 

Article  XIII. — The  column  being  by  company,  form 
divisions  from  a  halt.  No.  3G1,  or  in  march.  No. 
376. 

Article  XIV. — The  column  being  by  division,  to  form 
it  to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle  at  a  halt, 
No.  401,  or  in  march,  No.  402. 

Lesson  Fifth. 

Article  I. — The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  am 
at  a  halt,  to  ploy  it  by  division  into  column  closed, 
in  mass  on  the  right  division,  No.  119,  or  on  the 
left  division,  No  141,  or  on  an  interior  divisi(m,Noj 
143,  the  right  or  left  in  front.  Ploy  the  battalioi 
marching  in  line  of  battle  on  the  right  or  left  divW 
sion,  No.  149. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  221 

Article-  II. — Execute  the  countermarch,  No.  352. 

Article  ///.—Change  direction  to  the  right,  No.  307, 
to  the  left.  No.  313,  by  the  flank  of  the  column. 

Article  IV. — Deploy  the  C(»luran  on  the  right  division, 
No.  514,  on  the  left  division,  No.  541,  or  on  any  in- 
terior division,  the  column  being  at  a  halt,  or 
marching.  No.  563. 

Article  V. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  column  by  divi- 
sion at  half  distance  marching.  No.  556. 

Article  VI. — Ploy  the  battalion  by  company,  closed  in 
mass,  and  form  it  on  the  right  or  left  into  line  of 
battle.  No.  577. 

Article  VII. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column, 
at  half  distance.  No.  777,  or  closed  in  mass,  No. 
793,  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt,  or  marching. 

Article  VIII. — March  in  this  order,  and  change  direc- 
tion. No.  794. 

Article  IX. — Deploy  the  column  at  a  halt,  No.  796,  or 
marching.  No.  SbO,  and  without  suspending  the 
march.  No.  802. 


Article  X. — The  double  column  being  at  half  dis- 
tance, form  it  into  line  of  b;ittle  fa<;ed  to  the  right 
or  left,  No.  803,  the  column  being  in  march.  No.  8('7. 
Execute  the  same  movement  without  suspending 
the  march,  No.  810. 


22S  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Article  X/.— Perpendicular  or  parallel  squares,  the 
battalion  being  deployed,  Nos.  889,   895.     Oblique 
squares,    the    battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  No. 
938,  or  in  column,  No.  945.    Squares  in  lour  ranks 
No.  911. 

Lesson    Sixth. 

Article  /.—March  in  line  of  battle.  No.  587.  Halt 
the  battalion,  No.  G35,  and  align  it,  No.  H40. 

Article  II. — Change  direction  in  line  of  battle,  ad- 
vancing, No.  652,  or  in  retreat,  No.  081.  Execute 
passage  of  obstacles,  No.  682. 

Article  III. — Oblique  march  in  lino  of  battle,  No, 
623, 

Article  IV. — Disperse  and  rally  the  "battalion  in  line 
of  battle,  No.  974,  and  rally  the  battalion  in  .col- 
umn by  company,  No.  978. 


REMARKS 

ON   THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION, 

In  every  course  of  instruction,  the  first  lesson  will 
be  executed  several  times  in  the  order  in  which  it  is 
arranged ;  but  as  soon  as  the  battalion  shall  be  con- 


SCiiO'OL  'OF  'i'HE  BATTALION.  233 

firiiied  in  the  principles  of  the  lesson,  the  fires  will 
be  executed  alter  the  advance  in  line,  and  after  the 
various  torniations  into  line  of  battle,  and  into  square. 
Particular  attention  will  be  given  to  the  tire  by  file, 
which  is  that  principally  used  in  war. 

Every  lesson  of  this  school  will  be  executed  with 
the  utmost  precision  ;  but  the  second,  which  com- 
prehends the  march  in  column,  and  the  march  in  line 
of  battle,  being  of  the  most  importance,  will  be  the 
oftenest  repeated,  especially  in  the  beginning. 

Great  attention  ought,  also,  to  be  given  to  the 
fourth  lesson,  which  comprehends  the  march  in  coU 
luaun  by  division,  and  the  dispositions  against  cavalry. 

The  successive  formations  will  sometimes  be  exe- 
icuted  by  inversion. 

In  the  beginning,  the  march  in  column,  the  march 
,iu  liue  of  battle,  and  the  march  by  the  flank,  will  be 
executed  only  in  quick  time,  and  will  be  continued 
■until  the  battalion  shall  have  become  well  estaDlished 
in  the  cadence  of  this  step. 

T.he  non->eadeneed  step  will  be  employed  in  this 
rSChuoI  only  in  the  repetition  of  the  movements  in- 
,cident  to  a  column  in  route,  or  when  great  celerity 
^ay  be  required. 

■When  it  may  be  desired  to  give  the  men  relief, 
iirms  may  be  supported,  if  at  &  halt,  or  marching  by 
the  flank. 

In  marching  by  tbe  front,  aiius  may  be  shifted  to 
the  right  shoulder ;  but  not  in  the  march  in  line  of 
battle  until  the  battalions  shall  be  well  instructed. 


224  fi^CnOOLOF  THE  BATTALION. 

After  arms  have  been  carried  for  sdine  time  on  the 
ri^ht  shoulder,  they  may  be  shifted,  in  like  manner, 
to  the  left  shoulder. 

When  a  battalion  is  manceuvring,  its  movements 
will  be  covered  by  skirmishers. 

All  the  companies  will  be  exercised,  successively, 
in  this  service. 

When  a  battalion,  instructed  in  this  drill,  shall  be 
required  to  manoeuvre  in  the  evolutions  of  the  line, 
its  movements  will  be  regulated  by  the  instructions 
contained  in  the  third  volume  of  the  Tactics  for  heavy 
Infiintrv,  approved  bv  the  War  Department,  April 
10th,  1835. 


TABLE  OP  CONTENTS 
Vol.  IL 

TITLE    FOURTH. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Page 

Formation  of  the  battalion ,  No.  1 , 5 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color-escort,  No.  4,  5 

Honors  paid  to  the  color,  No.  11, 7 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the 

battalion,  No.  14, 7 

PAET  FIRST. 

Article  I. — To  open  and  close  ranks,  No.  22,.       9 

Article  II.— Manual  of  arms.  No.  30, 11 

Article  III  — Loading  at  will,  and  the  firings, 

No.  31, 11 

15 


226 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PART  SECOND. 


Page. 


Article  I. — To  break  by  company  Ui  the  right, 
No.  69.  Break  by  company  to  the  left,  No.  74. 
Break  by  division,  No.  75.  To  break  by  com- 
pany, marching,  No.  84 


battalion 

Hum,  No. 


18 


Article  II. — Break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies.  No.  87.  Break  to  the  rear 
by  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  marching, 
No.  94.  Advance  or  retire  l)y  the  right  or  left 
of  companies.  No.  105.  Advance  or  retire  by 
the  right  or  left  of  companies,  marching,  No. 
110.  Advancing  or  retiring,  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies,  to  form  line  to  the  front, 
No.  113 23 

Article  III. — rh)y  the  battalion  into  close  col- 
on the  first  division,  No.  119.  Ph)y  the 
into  close  colnmn  on  the  fonrth  divi- 
141.  Ploy  the  battalion  into  close 
column  on  any  interior  division,  No.  14:}.  Bat- 
talion l)eing  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into  column  on 
the  first  division,  No.  149 29 


PART  THIRD. 


Article  I. — March  in  colnmn  at  full  distance. 
No.  104.  Colunm  being  in  march,  to  execute 
the  about,  No.  170.     Culumu  arriving  in  front 


table  of  contents.  227 

Page. 

of  the  line  of  battle,  to  prolong  it  on  this  line, 
No.  175.  Cohimn  arriving  behind  the  line  of 
battle,  to  prolong  it  on  this  line,  No.  184.  Col- 
umn arriving  on  the  right  or  the  left  of  the  line 
of  bnttle,  to  prolong  it  on  this  line,  No.  188. 
Manner  of  prolonging  a  line  by  markers,  No. 
189 1 37 

Article  II. — Column  in  route.  No.  198 48 

Article  III. — Change  of  direction  in  column  at 

full  distance,  No.  231 55 

Article  IV. — Halt  the  column,  No.  239 57 

Article  V.  — Close  the  column  to  half  distance, 
or  in  mass,  No.  252.  Close  the  column  on  the 
eighth  company.  No.  267.  Execute  this  move- 
ment, marching,  No.  273 60 

Article  YI. — March  in  column  at  half  distance, 
or  closed  in  mass.  No.  281 65 

Article  VII.— Change  direction  in  column  at 
half  distance.  No.  287 66 

Article  VIII. — Change  direction  of  a  column 
closed  in  mass,  marching,  No.  288.  Change 
direction  of  a  column,  closed  in  mass,  from  a 
halt.  No.  3U6, 67 

Article  IX. — Take  distances  by  the  head  of  the 
column,  No.  323.  Take  distances  by  the  rear 
of  the"  column.  No.  333.  Take  distances  on  the 
head  of  the  column.  No.  341 73 

Article  X. — Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full 
or  half  distance.  No.  351.  Countermarch  of  a 
column  closed  iu  mass,  No.  352 79 


228  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Page 

Article  XI. — Being  in  column  by  company, 
closed  in  mass,  to  form  divisions,  No.  364.  To 
form  divisions,  marcliing,  No.  37(5 81 

PART  FOURTH. 


AuTiPf^E  I. — Manner  of  determining  the  line  of 
battle,  No.  389 87 

Artici-E  II. — To  form  a  column,  at  full  distance, 
to  the  left  into  line  of  l)attle,  No.  390.  To  form 
a  colunmtothe  right  into  line  of  battle,  No.  399. 
A  column  being  in  march,  to  form  it  into  line  of 
battle.  No.  402.  To  form  a  column  into  line  of 
battle,  and  to  move  it  forward,  No.  403.  By  in- 
version to  the  right  oi"  left  into  line  of  battle, 
No.  407.  Column  at  full  distance,  to  form  it  on 
the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle.  No.  414. 
Column  at  full  distance,  forward  into  line  of 
battle,  No.  440.  Forward  into  lin«;  of  battle, 
marching.  No.  452.  Colunm  at  full  distance, 
faced  to  the  rear  into  lint'  of  battle,  No.  4()6. 
Execute  this  movement,  marching.  No.  479...     87 

Article  III. — Formation  in  lino  of  battle  by 
two  movements,  No.  485 r..    110 

Article  TV. — Different  modes  of  forming  col- 
umn at  half  distance,,  to  the  left  or  right,  into 
line  of  battle.  No.  501 .  By  the  rear  of  column, 
left  or  right,  into  line,  wheel,  No.  503.  Column 


table  of  contents.  2q9 

Page. 

at  half  distance,  on  the  right  or  left,  into  line. 
No.  507.  Cohiinn,  at  half  distance,  forward 
into  line.  No.  5U8.  Column,  at  half  distance, 
faced  to  the  rear  into  line,  No.  509 113 

Article  V. — Deployment  of  columns  closed  in 
mass,  No.  510.  Deployment  on  the  first  divi- 
sion, No.  5J4.  To  de])loy,  whilst  marching,  on 
the  first  divison.  No.  532.  To  deploy  without 
halting  the  column,  and  to  continue  mai-ching, 
No.  536.  To  deploy  on  the  fourth  division.  No. 
541 .  To  deploy,  whilst  marching,  on  the  fourth 
division,  No,  556.  To  deploy  on  an  interior  di- 
vision, No.  563.  To  deploy,  whilst  marching, 
on  an  interior  division.  No.  567 116 

PART   FIFTH. 

Article  I. — To  advance  in  line  of  battle,  No.  587.  132 

Article  II. — Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle, 
No.  623 141 

Article  III. — To  halt  the  battalion,  marching 
in  line  of  battle,  and  to  align  it.  No.  635 143 

Article  IV. — Change  of  direction  in  marching 
in  line  of  battle,  No.  652 146 

Article  V. — To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, No.  664 149 

Article  VI. — To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in 
retreat,  aiid  to  face  it  to  the  front,  No.  676. . .  151 


230  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Article  VII. — Change  of  direction,  in  march- 
ing in  retreat,  No.  681 152 

Article  VIII. — Passage  of  obstacles,  advanc- 
ing and  retreating,  No.  682 153 

Article  IX. — To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the 
right  or  left  flank,  No.  710 159 

Article  X.— To  march  by  the  flank.  No.  722..  162 

Article  XI. — To  form  fie  baitilion  on  the  right 
or  left,  by  file,  into  line  .»f  bat  .'e,  No.  735 164 

ArticI;E  XII. — Change  of  front  perpendicnlarly 
forwiird,  No.  743.  Change  front  forward  on 
the  first  company,  marching,  No.  754.  Change 
of  front  perpendicularly  to  the  rear.  No.  761..  165 

Article  XIII. — To  ploy  the  battnlion  into  col- 
nnni,  doubled  on  the  centre,  No.  776.  To  form 
double  column,  marching,  No. 787.  Deployment 
of  the  double  colunm,  faced  to  the  front,  No.  796. 
Deployment  of  the  double  column  marching, 
No.  800.  To  form  the  double  column  into  line 
of  battle,  fact'd  to  tlie  right  or  left,  No.  803.  To 
form  the  double  column  into  line  of  battle,  fac- 
ed to  the  right  or  left,  marching,  No.  807 172 

Article  XIV. — Dispositions  against  cavalry  No. 
817.  A  cobinni  being  in  march  at  full  distance, 
to  form  square,  No.  837.  If  the  c(»lunm  be  closed 
in  mass,  to  make  dispositions  to  form  square  No.- 
847.  The  battalion  being  in  square,  to  move  it  in 
advance  by  one  of  its  fronts.  No.  854.    To  halt 


J 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  231 

Page. 

the  square,  No.  860.  The  battalion  being  in 
square,  to  form  column  to  march  to  the  front,  a 
distance  greater  than  thirty  paces,  No.8G3.  To 
march  the  square  in  retreat  a  greater  distance 
than  thirty  paces,  No.  872.  The  battalion  being 
in  square,  to  march  itin  advance,  or  in  retreat,  a 
distance  less  than  thirty  paces.  No.  876.  The 
column  marching  to  the  front,  to  march  it  in  re- 
treat, No.  879.  The  column  marching  in  retreat, 
to  march  it  to  the  front.  No.  881 .  To  reduce  the 
square.  No.  883.  To  form  square  from  line  of  bat- 
tle, No.  885.  Perpendicular  square.  No.  888. 
Perpendicular  square,  marching.  No.  890.  To 
form  square  by  double  column.  No.  892.  To  form 
square  by  double  column,  marching,  No.  894. 
Observations  relative  to  the  formation  of  squares 
in  tvs^o  ranks,  No.  896.  The  column  being 
formed  of  four  divisions,  to  place  the  inner  pla- 
toons of  the  thiid  division  in  reserve.  No.  898. 
Squares  in  four  ranks.  No.  910.  The  square 
formed  in  four  ranks  being  reduced,  and  at  a  halt, 
to^form  the  battalion  into  two'iranks.  No.  916. 
The  column  being  in  march  with  divisions  form- 
ed in  four  ranks,  to  re-form  it  into  tv^^o  ranks.  No. 
920.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the 
flank  divisions,  No.' 923.'^  Form  square  in  four 
ranks  on  the  first  division,  marching,  No.  928. 
Form  perpendicular  squaTe  in  four  ranks,  by 
double  column.  No.  931.     Fonn  perpendicular 


232  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Page, 

square  in  four  ranks,  by  double  column,  march- 
ing, No.  935.  Oblique  square.  No.  938.  Oblique 
square,  being  in  column.  No,  945.  Column 
against  cavalry,  No.  985.  The  battalion  being  no 
longer  threatened  by  cavalry,  to  form  column, 
No.970 182 

Article  XY.— The  rally,  No.  974 213 

Article  XVI. — Rules  for  manoeuvring  by  the 
rear  rank,  No.  979 214 


THE  END. 


W''^